Contents

BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 252
1 of 252

Summary of Content for BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

650i Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

2009 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VIII/09, 09 09 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Contents

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use the index, refer to page 234.

Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects

At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 21 Letters and numbers 22 Voice activation system

Controls 26 Opening and closing 45 Adjusting 53 Transporting children safely 56 Driving 72 Controls Overview 82 Technology for comfort, convenience

and safety 98 Lamps 103 Climate 109 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips 118 Things to remember when driving

Navigation 126 Navigation system 127 Destination entry 136 Destination guidance 142 What to do if

Entertainment 146 On/off and tone 149 Radio 152 Satellite radio 154 CD/DVD player and CD changer 161 Music collection 166 External devices

Communications 172 Telephone 184 Contacts 186 BMW Assist

Mobility 194 Refueling 196 Wheels and tires 202 Under the hood 206 Maintenance 208 Care 212 Replacing components 216 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference 224 Technical data 228 Short commands of voice activation

system 234 Everything from A to Z

N o

te s

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual We have made every effort to ensure that you are able to find what you need in this Owner's Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be happy to advise you.

You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech- nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.<

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.<

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.<

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.

* Indicates special equipment, country-spe- cific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet avail- able at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

These sections contain information on using the voice activation system.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

5

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The individual vehicle When purchasing your BMW, you have decided in favor of a model with individualized equip- ment and features. This Owner's Manual describes all models and equipment offered by BMW within the same line.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con- tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible that the features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires specially adapted mainte- nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor- responding work on your BMW performed only by your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz- ards.<

N o

te s

6

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi- cle, its operation or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment such as CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or the like may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehi- cle's electrical system, or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer- tified automotive part.<

California Proposition 65 Warning California law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

7

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran- ties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con- ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehi- cle to meet different prevailing operating condi- tions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 831- 1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your center, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can- ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca

At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming

acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating

the various systems.

C o

ck p

it

10

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1 Convertible: opening and closing rear window 37

2 Convertible: opening and closing windows together 37

3 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 36

4 Opening and closing front windows 36

5 Exterior mirrors, folding in and out 51

6 Adjusting exterior mirrors 51 Automatic curb monitor 51

7 Turn signals 61

High beams, headlamp flasher 100

High-beam Assistant* 100

Roadside parking lamps 100

Check Control 77

Computer 73

A t

a g

la n

ce

11

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

8 Buttons on steering wheel

9 Instrument cluster 12

12 Ignition lock 56

13 Horn, entire surface

16 Releasing hood 202

Mobile phone* 172:

> Press: accepting and ending a call, starting dialing* of selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected

Volume

Activating/deactivating voice acti- vation system* 22

Changing radio station 149 Selecting music track 154 Scrolling in phone book and in lists with stored phone numbers

Changing entertainment source

Switching recirculated-air mode on/off 105

Lane Departure Warning* 96

10 Windshield wipers 62

Rain sensor 62

11 Starting/stopping engine and switching ignition on/off 56

14 Steering wheel heater* 52

Steering wheel adjustment 52

15 Cruise control* 63

Active cruise control 64

17 Opening luggage compartment lid 31

18 Head-up Display* 93

BMW Night Vision* 94

19 Parking lamps 98

Low beams 98 Welcome lamps 98 Automatic headlamp control 98 Daytime running lamps* 99 Welcome lamps 98 Adaptive Light Control* 99 High-beam Assistant* 100

20 Instrument lighting 102

Fog lamps 102

C o

ck p

it

12

Instrument cluster

1 Indicator lamps for turn signals

2 Speedometer

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13

4 Displays for

> Active cruise control* 68

> Lane Departure Warning* 96

5 Tachometer 72

6 Engine oil temperature* 73

7 Display for

> Time/date 72

> Outside temperature 72

> Indicator and warning lamps 78

> Speed for cruise control 64

> Desired speed for active cruise control* 68

8 Display for

> Odometer and trip odometer 72

> Computer 73

> Date and remaining travel distance for service requirements 75

> Sport automatic transmission* 58

> Dynamic Driving Control* 60

> High-beam Assistant* 100

> Check Control message present 78

9 Fuel gauge 73

10 Resetting trip odometer 72

A t

a g

la n

ce

13

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.

Some lamps are tested for proper function by briefly lighting up during starting of the engine or when the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Additional information, e.g. on the cause and elimination of a malfunction, can be opened via the Check Control system, refer to page 77.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps signal particular functions:

High beams/headlamp flasher 100

Fog lamps 102

Parking brake applied 58

Parking brake for Canadian models

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC controls the drive and braking forces for maintaining vehicle stability 84

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 84

Exhaust-gas values 207

Exhaust-gas values for Canadian models 207

C o

ck p

it

14

Around the center console: controls and displays

A t

a g

la n

ce

15

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

1 Coupe: glass sunroof, electric with raise tilt function* 38

2 Coupe: microphone for hands-free mode for telephone* and voice activation system* 22 Convertible: microphone on steering col- umn

3 Reading lamps 102

4 Interior lamps 102

5 Coupe: initiating SOS emergency request216

6 Indicator lampfor front passenger airbags 91

7 Convertible: initiating SOS emergency request* 216

8 Control Display 16

9 Hazard warning flashers

10 Central locking system 30

11 Automatic climate control 103

12 CD/DVD drive 146

13 Programmable memory buttons 20

14 Switching entertainment sound output on/ off and adjusting volume 146

15 Changing

> radio station 149

> track 146

16 Ejecting CD/DVD 154

18 Bracket for cupholder 112

19 Controller 16 Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four directions

20 Buttons on the controller 17 Selecting menus directly

21 Dynamic Driving Control 60

Temperature setting, left/ right 104

Automatic air distribution and volume 104

Cooling function 105

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 105

Recirculated-air mode 105

Maximum cooling 105

Residual heat mode 106

Switching off automatic climate control 106

Air volume 105

Defrosting windows and removing condensation 105

Rear window defroster 105

17 Heated seats* 50

PDC Park Distance Control* 82

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 84

Convertible: opening the convert- ible top 40

Convertible: closing the convertible top 40

iD ri

ve

16

iDrive

iDrive combines the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a central position. The following section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of the individual func- tions is described in connection with the rele- vant equipment.

Controls

1 Control Display

2 Controller with buttons You can use the buttons to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select the menu items and create settings.

> Call up a menu directly, arrow 3

> Move in four directions, arrows 4

> Turn, arrow 5

> Press, arrow 6

To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard due to inattention, both to your own vehi-

cle's occupants and to other road users: never attempt to use the controls or make entries unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

A t

a g

la n

ce

17

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Basic operation From radio readiness, refer to page 56, the fol- lowing message is shown on the Control Dis- play:

To hide the message: Press the controller. This displays the start menu.

The message is hidden after approx. 10 sec- onds.

Opens the main menu Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting a menu item The menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

A new menu is displayed or the function is exe- cuted.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings".

Changing between panels After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can overlap.

Buttons on the controller Function

MENU Opens the main menu

RADIO Opens the Radio menu

CD Opens CD/Multimedia

NAV Opens the Navigation menu

TEL Opens the Telephone menu

BACK Opens the previous menu

OPTION Opens the Options menu

iD ri

ve

18

Move the controller to the left or right to change between the panels.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi- cate that additional panels can be opened.

Opens the Options menu Press the OPTION button. The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional option: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu appears.

The "Options" menu contains the following:

> Screen settings, refer to page 19.

> Control options for the selected menu.

Adjusting settings 1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

The scroll bar on the right side indicates whether additional menu items or set-

tings can be selected that are currently not vis- ible.<

An example: setting the clock 1. Press the MENU button.

The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high- lighted, and then press the controller.

3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

A t

a g

la n

ce

19

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high- lighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information

1 Time

2 Display for:

> Reception strength of the wireless network, depends on the mobile phone

> Incoming, outgoing or missed call

> SMS* received

> Phone book* loading

> Roaming* active

3 Display for:

> Entertainment: Radio, CD/DVD, external devices

> Phone book*: Name of the mobile phone paired with the vehicle

4 Sound output is switched off or traffic bulletin display*:

> "TI": Traffic bulletins are switched on.

> No display: Traffic bulletins are switched off.

Other displays: The status information is temporarily hidden when there are Check Control instructions or inputs via the voice activation system*.

Switching the control display on/off 1. Press the OPTION button.

2. "Switch off display"

To switch on, press the controller.

Split screen Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g. information from the computer.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off 1. Press the OPTION button.

2. "Split screen"

The split screen is activated.

iD ri

ve

20

Selecting the display for the split screen content When the split screen is switched on, you can select the content displayed on the screen.

1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen content is selected.

2. Select the display.

Programmable memory buttons Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the programmable memory keys and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destina- tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.

Storing functions 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. ... Press the desired button longer than 2 seconds.

Example for programmable memory keys Switch the voice instructions for the navigation on/off.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol using the controller.

4. ... Press the desired button longer than 2 seconds.

Executing a function ... Press the button.

The function is executed immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying button assignment Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

Displaying short info ... Touch the button.

The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

Displaying detailed information ... Touch the button longer.

A t

a g

la n

ce

21

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Letters and numbers

Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select the letters or

numbers.

2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.

3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering letters and numbers:

Wordmatch concept during navigation Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

Destination search: the entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

> The only letters offered for entering addresses are those for which data are available.

Town/city names can be entered with the spell- ing used in any of the languages available on the Control Display.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete one letter or number

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers

Enter a blank space

Symbol Function

Entering letters

Entering numbers

V o

ic e

ac ti

va ti

o n

sy st

em

22

Voice activation system

The concept The voice activation system allows you to con- trol operation of various vehicle systems with- out removing your hands from the steering wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. This frees you of having to use the controller.

The voice activation system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

The voice activation system includes a special microphone.

The microphone is located:

> Near the interior rearview mirror in the Coupe, refer to page 14

> On the steering column in the Convertible

Precondition Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the voice activation system in order to enable iden- tification of the spoken commands. To set the language of iDrive, refer to page 80.

Symbols in Owner's Manual

Voice commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Press the button.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal tell you that the voice activation system can respond to com- mands.

2. Say the command. The command is displayed on the Control Display.

This symbol is shown on the Control Display when you can input additional commands. If no other commands are possible, then oper- ate the equipment via iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice command Press the button on the steering wheel or

*

{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti- vation system.

{Cancel}

A t

a g

la n

ce

23

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the procedure can only be canceled using the but- ton on the steering wheel.

Possible commands The commands available in each case depend on the menu item selected on the Control Dis- play. To have the possible commands read aloud:

For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the com- mands for operating CD/Multimedia are read aloud.

Calling up functions immediately via short commands Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately, irrespective of which menu item is selected, refer to page 228.

An example: selecting the track of a CD 1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if

necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts and responses from the system are abbrevi- ated.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select a setting:

> "Default"

> "Short"

Notes To operate the phone by voice, refer to page 179.<

For voice commands, bear in mind the follow- ing:

> Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.

> Say the commands and numbers smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses. This also applies when spelling out and saying a full word during destination entry.

> When selecting a radio station, use the common pronunciation of the station name.

> For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice activation system and no abbrevia- tions.

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sun- roof* or convertible top closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.

> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

{Voice commands}

3. Select the music track, e.g.: {CD track 4} System says: {{Track 4}}

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle. Its extensive array of features and accessories,

both for driving and for your own safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

26

Opening and closing

Keys/remote control

1 Remote control with integrated key

2 Spare key

3 Adapter for spare key, in glove compart- ment

Remote control with integrated key Each remote control contains a battery which is charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice a year to keep the battery charged. For Comfort Access*, the remote control con- tains a replaceable battery, refer to page 35.

Depending on which remote control is detected by the vehicle during unlocking, different set- tings are activated and executed in the vehicle, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

Information on the required for maintenance is also stored in the remote control, refer to Ser- vice data in remote control, page 206.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Hotel function, refer to page 30

> Driver's door, refer to page 29

> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 31

New remote controls To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new remote controls with an integrated key are available at your BMW center.

Spare key Store the spare key in a safe place such as your wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.

The spare key and integrated key of the remote control fit the same locks.

Adapter for spare key The adapter is required so that the vehicle can be started with the spare key or radio readiness can be switched on.

Remove the adapter from the holder in the glove compartment and slide the spare key into the adapter before use.

Personal Profile

The concept You can set a number of functions of your BMW individually according to your preferences. Per- sonal Profile ensures that most of these set- tings are stored for the remote control currently in use without you having to do anything. When

C o

n tr

o ls

27

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding remote control is detected and the settings stored for it are called up and carried out.

This means that you will always find your BMW set to your own personal settings even if another person with his/her own remote control and settings has used the vehicle since the last time you drove it. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls, for two with Comfort Access*.

Personal Profile settings Details on the settings are provided on the specified pages.

> Behavior of the central locking system when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 28

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 30

> Displays on Control Display:

> 12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 77

> Date format, refer to page 77

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 81

> Units of measure for consumption, route/distances, temperature and pres- sure, refer to page 74

> Language on the Control Display, refer to page 80

> Lighting settings:

> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 62

> Welcome lamps, refer to page 98

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 99

> Daytime running lamps*, refer to page 99

> High-beam Assistant*, refer to page 100

> PDC Park Distance Control*: optical warn- ing, refer to page 82

> Head-up Display*: selection and brightness of display, refer to page 93

> BMW Night Vision*: display settings, refer to page 96

> Automatic climate control: for AUTO pro- gram and intensity, cooling function, and automatic recirculated air control/recircu- lated air mode, temperature, air distribution, temperature in the upper body region, refer to page 104

> Navigation system*: voice instructions for destination guidance, refer to page 137

In addition, the following, most recently selected settings are recalled during unlocking:

> Programmable memory buttons: selecting stored functions, refer to page 20

> Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steering- wheel position, refer to page 47

> Audio sources: volume and tone settings, refer to page 146

> Radio: display of stored stations, refer to page 151

> Phone: adjusting volume, refer to page 175

Central locking system

The concept The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

> Doors

> Compartment in the front center console

> Luggage compartment lid

> Fuel filler flap

Operating from outside > Via the remote control

> Using door lock

> With Comfort Access* via the door handles

These actions operate the anti-theft system* at the same time. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han- dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps* are also switched on and off with the remote control. The alarm systemis armed/dis- armed at the same time.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

28

You can find more detailed information on the alarm systemon page 33.

Operating from inside Via the central locking button, refer to page 30. The fuel filler flapand the compartment in the front center console are not locked, refer to page 30.

In the event of a serious accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addi- tion, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: Using remote control

Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from

the inside. Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<

Unlocking Press the button. The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps*, and the welcome lamps are switched on.

Setting unlocking behavior You can set whether the first press of the button unlocks only the driver's door or the entire vehi- cle.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button"

4. Select a menu item:

> "All doors" Pressing the button once unlocks the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only" Pressing the button once unlocks the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. Pressing the button twice unlocks the entire vehicle.

> "Comfort opening", refer to page 28

5. Press the controller.

Convenient opening mode Press and hold the button:

> Coupe: the windows are opened, the glass sunroof* is raised and the sliding visor slides back.

> Convertible: the windows and the convert- ible top are opened.

Watch the convertible top during the opening process to be sure that no

one is injured. Releasing the button stops the operation.<

Locking Press the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside, as unlocking from the

inside is not possible without special knowl- edge.<

Switching on interior lamps With vehicle locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode* You can trigger the alarm system in case of dan- ger:

Press the button for at least 3 seconds.

Switching off alarm: press any button.

Opening luggage compartment lid Press the button for approx. 1 second.

C o

n tr

o ls

29

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The luggage compartment lid opens, regard- less of whether it was previously locked or unlocked.

A previously locked luggage compart- ment lid is also locked again after closing.

Coupe: during opening, the luggage compart- ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure that adequate clearance is available before open- ing.<

Confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

4. Press the controller.

Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehi- cle is switched on.

Malfunction The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. Should the remote control fail to operate due to interference of this kind, unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock using a key.

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle using the remote control, then the battery is discharged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, refer to page 26.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:

FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and

> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Opening and closing: Using door lock

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside, as unlocking from the

inside is not possible without special knowl- edge.<

When unlocking 1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's

door and the fuel filler flap.

2. A second turn of the key unlocks the pas- senger door and luggage compartment lid.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

30

Convenient opening and closing You can use the door lock to operate the win- dows and the glass sunroof* in the Coupe or to operate the windows and the top in the Con- vertible.

Turn and hold the key in the positions for unlocking or locking.

Keep a close eye on the closing process and also on the opening process of the

convertible top to be sure that no one is injured. Releasing the key stops the operation.<

Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can turn a key all the way to the right or left in the door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti- vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Automatic locking iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. Select the desired function:

> "Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system locks again

after a short time if no door has been opened.

> "Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you start to drive.

4. Press the controller.

Automatic locking is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Unlocking and opening > Either unlock both doors at the same time

with the button for the central locking sys- tem and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking > Use the central locking button to lock both

of the doors simultaneously, or

> press down the lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from

the inside. Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<

Hotel function The hotel function locks the compartment in the front center console and the luggage com- partment lid separately and disconnects them

C o

n tr

o ls

31

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

from the central locking system. If you hand over the remote control without the integrated key, refer to page 26, e.g. at a hotel, then this prevents access to the luggage compartment and to the compartment in the front center con- sole.

Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration, until the key slot points in the direction of travel and then remove: The hotel function is activated after subsequent locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The system locks the luggage compartment lid and the compartment in the front center console and disconnects them from the central locking sys- tem.

Unlocking manually In order to manually unlock the compartment in the front center console in the event of an elec- trical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the right until it reaches the stop.

If unlocking was manual, return the lock to the home position, i.e. all the way back to

the left, before reactivating the hotel function.<

Doors

Automatic soft closing* To close the doors, merely push them gently. The closing process will then be carried out automatically.

Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear; otherwise injuries may

result.<

Luggage compartment lid During opening, the luggage compart- ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure

that adequate clearance is available before opening.<

Opening from inside

Press the button: The luggage compartment lid opens, provided that it is not locked or the hotel function is not activated, refer to the above section.

Opening from outside

Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid opens.

Convertible: if the convertible top is not completely open or closed, then the lug-

gage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer to page 40.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

32

Unlocking manually

The luggage compartment lid lock is located under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to page 26, fit the luggage-compartment lid lock.

Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the luggage compartment lid opens.

If you use the lock to open the luggage compartment lid while the alarm system

is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent this, you should deactivate the alarm before- hand. If the alarm is inadvertently triggered: switch off the alarm, refer to page 33.<

Closing Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear; other-

wise, injuries may result.<

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down.

Emergency release

Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.

Luggage compartment There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners of the luggage compartment for securing lug- gage nets* or securing straps to fix luggage in position. Also refer to Securing cargo, page 122.

Convertible: increasing luggage compartment capacity

With the convertible top closed, you can increase the luggage compartment capacity: To do so, unfold the handle and press it down- ward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow. This moves the convertible top compartment floor into the raised position.

Before opening the convertible top, carry out this procedure in reverse order.

The convertible top cannot be opened if the convertible top compartment floor is

in the raised position.<

C o

n tr

o ls

33

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Alarm system

The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:

> To the opening of a door, the hood, or the luggage compartment lid

> To movements in the vehicle interior: inte- rior motion sensor, refer to page 33

> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle

> To interruptions in battery voltage

Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by the alarm system:

> with an acoustic alarm

> by switching onthe hazard warning flashers

> by flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

You can open the luggage compartment lid, even with the system armed, by using the

button of the remote control, refer to page 28. When the luggage compartment lid is closed, it is once again locked and monitored.

Switching off alarm > Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,

refer to page 28, or

> insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp displays

> The indicator lamp below the interior rear- view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- tem is armed.

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to mon- itor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. However, the interior motion sensor is not activated.

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.

> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted into the ignition lock, however for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted wheel theft or towing.

Interior motion sensor Coupe: In order for the interior motion sensor to func- tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof* must be completely closed.

Convertible: Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat cushions. This means that the alarm system, including the interior motion sensor, is armed even if the convertible top is open. Falling

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

34

objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This pre- vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

> In two-level garages

> When transporting on car-carrying trains, by sea or on a trailer

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse- quently locked again.

Comfort Access* Comfort Access allows you to access your vehi- cle without having to hold the remote control in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the associated remote control in the immediate vicinity or in the interior.

Comfort Access supports the following func- tions:

> Unlocking/locking vehicle

> Convenient closing with Coupe

> Opening luggage compartment lid sepa- rately

> Starting engine

Functional requirement > The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid

can only be locked if the vehicle detects that the remote control you are carrying is out- side the vehicle.

> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

> The engine can only be started if the vehicle detects that the remote control is located in the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control You can control the functions mentioned previ- ously with the Comfort Access or by pressing the buttons on the remote control. Therefore, please familiarize yourself with the information on opening and closing beginning on page 26 beforehand.

The special features when using Comfort Access are described in the following.

Should a short delay occur when opening or closing the windows, the glass sunroof

or the convertible top, the system is checking whether a remote control is located in the vehi- cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces- sary.<

Unlocking

Grasp a door handle fully, refer to arrow 1, but do not touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3 when doing so. This corresponds to pressing the

button.

Locking > On the driver's door, touch the highlighted

surface, arrow 2, with a finger for approx. 1 second, but do not grasp the door handle.

> On the front passenger door, touch the highlighted surface, arrow 3, with the back of your hand for approx. 1 second, but do not grasp the door handle.

C o

n tr

o ls

35

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

This corresponds to pressing the button.

Please make sure that the ignition and all electronic systems/consumers are

switched off before locking to save the bat- tery.<

Coupe: Convenient closing Hold a finger or the back of your hand against the surface, arrow 2 or 3, but do not grasp the door handle while doing so.

The windows, the glass sunroof* and the slid- ing visor are closed.

Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured. Removing the

hand from the door handle stops the closing process immediately.<

Opening luggage compartment lid separately Press the upper half of the BMW emblem. This corresponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control accidentally left in the luggage compartment is detected inside

the locked vehicle after the luggage compart- ment lid has been closed, then the luggage compartment lid opens again. The hazard warn- ing flashers flash and a signal* sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness By pressing the Start/Stop button, you switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 56.

When doing so, do not depress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will

start immediately.<

Starting engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni- tion if a remote control is located in the interior of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni- tion lock, refer to page 56.

If you take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. As long as no remote control is detected, it is only possible to

restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.

Switching off engine when equipped with sport automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off in trans- mission position P, refer to page 57. To switch off the engine in transmission posi- tion N, the remote control must be inserted in the ignition lock.

Before driving into a car wash in vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. Engage transmission position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction The Comfort Access function may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then open or close the vehicle with the buttons on the remote control or with a key. To start the engine following this, insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

When unlocking or locking/convenient closing do not simultaneously grasp the door handle and touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3. Other- wise, you may limit the function.

Replacing battery If the battery of the remote control is dead, a message will appear in the Control Display.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

36

1. Remove integrated key from remote con- trol, refer to page 26.

2. Remove cover.

3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing upward.

4. Press cover closed.

Return used battery to a recycling collec- tion point or to your BMW center.<

Windows To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the windows and keep them in

your field of vision until they are shut. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, operate the windows and injure them- selves.<

Coupe: Opening, closing

> Press switch to resistance point: The window continues to open as long as you keep the switch pressed.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Pressing

the switch again stops the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Convertible: Opening, closing To close the side windows while the vehi- cle is being driven, always close the rear

windows first or all four windows simulta- neously; otherwise, the windows cannot close tightly at higher speeds.<

Individually

> Press switch to resistance point: The window continues to open as long as you keep the switch pressed.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot be closed automatically.

C o

n tr

o ls

37

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Together

1. Briefly press button 1: The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up for approx. 10 seconds.

2. Press switch 2:

> Down to the resistance point: All windows, including the rear window, continue to open as long as you press the switch. You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: All windows open automatically. Press- ing the switch again stops the opening movement.

Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the function. The LEDs go out.

Rear window

1. Briefly press button 1: The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up for approx. 10 seconds.

2. Press switch 2:

> Down to the resistance point: The rear window continues to open for as long as you hold down the switch.

You can close the rear window in the same manner by pulling the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The rear window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening movement.

Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the function. The LEDs go out.

The rear window opens and closes auto- matically when you open or close the con-

vertible top.<

For information on using the Convenient open- ing and closing mode at the door lock or with the remote control, refer to page 28 or 30.

Coupe: For information on convenient closing with Comfort Access, refer to page 35.

After switching off ignition You can still operate the windows with the remote control removed or the ignition switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as neither of the doors has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system, inspect the window's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired. Convertible: the rear side windows and rear window are not equipped with a pinch protec- tion system. Therefore, watch the rear side win- dows and the rear window during closing, oth- erwise injuries can occur.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

38

Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside or if, for example, ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro- ceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold. The pinch protection system is limited and the window opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold again within approx. 4 seconds. The window closes without the pinch pro- tection system.

Coupe: Glass sunroof, electric with raise function* The glass sunroof and sliding visor are opera- tional whenever the ignition is switched on.

To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the glass sunroof and keep it in

your field of vision until it is shut. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, operate the roof and injure them- selves.<

Raising and closing glass sunroof

> Briefly press the switch: The sunroof opens and the sliding visor moves back approx. 2 in/5 cm or press the switch twice beyond the resis- tance point toward the rear: The sunroof opens and the sliding visor moves completely back.

> To close, briefly press the switch or push it twice beyond the resistance point toward the front: The sunroof and sliding visor close.

Opening and closing sliding visor > Push the switch up to the resistance point in

the desired direction: The sliding visor continues to move for as long as you hold the switch.

> Push the switch beyond the resistance point in the desired direction: The sliding visor moves automatically. Briefly press the switch again in any direc- tion to stop the movement.

For information on using the Convenient open- ing and closing mode at the door lock or with the remote control, refer to page 28 or 30.

For information on convenient closing with Comfort Access, refer to page 35.

Pinch protection system If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when closing, the closing action is interrupted and the glass sunroof opens. If the sliding visor encounters resistance when closing within the last approx. 8 in/20 cm, the closing action is interrupted and the sliding visor opens again slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system, inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof would con- tinue closing.<

Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside, slide the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold. The roof closes without the pinch protection system.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply After an interruption in the power supply the glass sunroof may not move. Then have the

C o

n tr

o ls

39

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

system initialized. Should this occur, please have the sunroof initialized at your BMW center.

Moving manually* In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass sunroof and the sliding visor manually.

Glass sunroof 1. Remove cover on headliner in front of rear

window. To do so, lift gently away from headliner at the front, arrow 1, using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 212. Grasp behind the cover, arrows 2 and pull firmly downward.

2. Insert the Allen wrench* into the opening provided.

3. Use the Allen wrench* to move the glass sunroof in the desired direction.

Sliding visor 1. Fold the cover downward, if necessary

using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 212.

2. Insert the Allen wrench* into the opening provided.

3. Use the Allen wrench* to move the sliding visor in the desired direction.

Convertible: Top The fully automatic convertible top combines secure weather protection with simple and easy-to-use operation.

Here are a few tips for getting the maximum pleasure from your Convertible:

> It is advisable to close the convertible top when the vehicle is parked. The closed con- vertible top not only protects the passenger compartment from unforeseen weather damage, it also provides a certain amount of protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if the convertible top is closed, only keep valuables in the locked luggage compart- ment.

> Do not attach luggage rack systems to the convertible top.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

40

In order to avoid damage, do not move the convertible top at temperatures below

+147/106. Do not leave the convertible top in its storage compartment for longer than one day when wet; otherwise, damage from moisture can occur. Do not place any objects on the convertible top; otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these objects could fall off and lead to damage or injury. Never move the convertible top when the roll- over protection system is raised. Driving without having completed the opening or closing action can lead to damage or injury. Do not place hands in the top mechanism dur- ing the opening and closing action. Keep chil- dren away from the travel path of the convert- ible top. For safety reasons, do not move the convertible top unless the vehicle is stationary.<

If you have initiated top movement with the vehicle at a stop and then start to

drive, e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/ 30 km/h: To do so, press and hold the corresponding button.<

Partial vacuums that occur at higher speeds in the passenger compartment

can make the convertible top flap. Use the auto- matic climate control to increase the air volume so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not occur.<

Prior to opening and closing > Observe the safety precautions above.

> Ensure that the convertible top compart- ment floor in the luggage compartment is folded down, refer to page 32, as otherwise the convertible top cannot be opened.

> Make sure that the luggage compartment lid is closed.

Opening and closing From radio readiness, refer to page 56, with the vehicle stationary:

To avoid putting excessive strain on the battery, only move the convertible top

when the engine is running if possible. Before closing the convertible top, remove for- eign objects from the windshield frame, as these might inhibit closing of the convertible top.<

1 To close, press and hold the button until the process is complete

2 LED

3 To open, press and hold the button until the process is complete

When the button for operating the con- vertible top is pressed, the side windows

move down all the way and the rear window is lowered completely. If the convertible top is not completely open or closed, then the luggage compartment lid can- not be opened.<

LED In the following situations, in addition to the LED, a message appears in the Control Display and an acoustic signal may sound:

> During convertible top operation, the LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the opening or closing action is finished.

> If the LED flashes red when you release the button, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.

> If the LED lights up red when the button is pressed, either the convertible top com- partment floor in the luggage compartment is in the raised position or a malfunction has occurred. The convertible top cannot be moved.

C o

n tr

o ls

41

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Interruption The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for top operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pressing the appropri- ate button. If the opening or closing action is interrupted for a longer period, the convertible top remains in that position for approx. 15 minutes before it slowly moves to a stable position.

A convertible top which is not completely opened or closed presents a danger.

Do not interrupt and continue the closing action several times in succession; otherwise, the top mechanism can be damaged.<

If the convertible top is not completely open or closed, then the luggage com-

partment lid cannot be opened.<

Convenient opening and closing with remote control and via door lock Refer to pages 28 and 30.

Closing manually Only close the convertible top manually if absolutely necessary; never open it man-

ually. The convertible top compartment lid can- not be locked in the event of an electrical mal- function and would open while the vehicle is being driven. Improper handling can lead to damage.<

Before closing 1. Open luggage compartment lid.

2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 212.

3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage com- partment with the screwdriver and then pull

firmly. This unlocks the convertible top compartment lid.

4. Close luggage compartment lid.

During manual convertible top opera- tion, the luggage compartment lid

cannot be opened.<

5. Completely open the side windows and the rear window. If the rear window cannot be opened using the switch, it must be lowered manually.

Opening rear window manually 1. Pry out the cover between the rear head

restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver as close as possible to the locking ele- ments, as shown in the illustration.

2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible into the opening and turn firmly in the direc-

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

42

tion indicated by the arrow until the rear window is completely open.

Closing Perform the following work steps with the assistance of a second person and with

the doors open, otherwise injury and damage to the convertible top can occur.<

1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the side panel forward. Reach into the resulting openings and raise the convertible top compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.

2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and right side frame, arrow 3.

Only lift out the top by the side frame, otherwise the top may be damaged.<

3. Together with the other person, pull the two sides of the convertible top out simulta-

neously and pivot forward. When doing so, keep the convertible top compartment lid open, arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.

Do not carry out the next operation, raising top ends, until the top has

been swung forward, otherwise damage can occur.<

4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as possible, arrow 5, and close the convertible top compartment lid, arrow 6.

5. Fold the top ends down onto the convert- ible top compartment lid.

6. From the interior, take out the cover in the center of the front top frame; use a screw- driver if necessary.

7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening provided.

C o

n tr

o ls

43

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

8. From the outside, both persons pull the front frame of the convertible top down- ward, as simultaneously as possible on the two sides.

9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the arrow until the front convertible top frame is locked to the windshield frame. The rear convertible top ends are automati- cally pressed onto the convertible top com- partment lid and close tightly with tension.

10. If necessary, close the rear window again manually in the same way as above.

Wind deflector* The wind deflector keeps the air movement in the passenger compartment to a minimum when the convertible top is open, thus enabling pleasant driving even at higher speeds.

The wind deflector is stowed in a protective sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short instructions for use are also provided on the protective sleeve.

Before installing 1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-

tive sleeve and fold it open, refer to arrows 1.

2. Press the upper and lower section together until the locking device engages, refer to arrow 2.

3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.

4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.

Installing 1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflec-

tor into the appropriate opening on the right side of the vehicle.

2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the recepta- cles provided.

3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into the appropriate opening until it snaps into place.

4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflec- tor.

With wind deflector fitted: do not incline the front seat backrests too far backward

if the seat is to be moved back to the end posi-

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

44

tion. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be dam- aged.<

Removing The same as installing, but in reverse order.

Folding up

1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle all the way back and release the locking mechanism.

2. Fold in the upper and lower section.

C o

n tr

o ls

45

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Adjusting

Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the interaction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the sitting position plays an important role in an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the fol- lowing section.

For additional information on Transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 53.

Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini- mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms in the event of airbag deployment. No one and nothing should to come between the airbags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the knee and front airbags are triggered. Make sure that occupants do not rest their head on the side or head airbags, otherwise injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.<

Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju- ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- porary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 90.

Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 48.

Safety belt Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Your vehicle has four seats that are each equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub against sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the safety belt without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in the upper body area periodically to readjust the tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the restraint of the safety belt.<

Safety belts refer to page 50.

Seats

Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement and the

A d

ju st

in g

46

ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. Also on the passenger side, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally pro- vided by the belt.<

Please follow the instructions on damage to safety belts provided on page 50 and the infor- mation on the active front head restraints on page 48.

Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted, do not incline the front seat backrests too

far backward if the seat is to be moved back to the end position. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be damaged.<

Adjusting seat To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on page 45.<

1 Angle

2 Longitudinal direction

3 Height

4 Backrest

5 Convertible: head restraints, refer to page 49

With the sports seat*, you can also adjust the thigh support manually:

Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the longitudinal direction.

Lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contours of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

> Increase or decrease curvature: press front or rear section of switch.

> Move curvature up or down: press upper or lowers section of switch.

C o

n tr

o ls

47

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory

You can store and select three different adjust- ment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mir- rors and steering wheel.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored in the memory.

Storing 1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer

to page 56.

2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel positions.

3. Press the button: The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3: The LED goes out.

Requesting Do not request a position from the mem- ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a

risk of accident from unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel.<

Comfort mode 1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or

switch on radio readiness, refer to page 56.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3.

The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.

The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel is interrupted if you briefly press the switch for

the steering wheel adjustment in any direction, refer to page 52.

Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition

on or off, refer to page 56.

2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3 and maintain pressure until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed inadvertently: press the button again; the LED goes out.

Requesting with remote control The last positions of the driver's seat, external rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored for the remote key currently in use.

You can select* when the position is requested.

> Request when unlocking vehicle

> Request when opening driver's door. In the Convertible, only this function is used.

When using this feature, always make sure that the footwell behind the driver's

seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<

The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Last seat position auto."

A d

ju st

in g

48

The function for automatically calling up the last seat position is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching off automatic call-up Deactivate "Last seat position auto.".

Front head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level. Otherwise

there is increased danger of injury in the event of an accident.Only remove the head restraints if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraints before transport- ing passengers, as otherwise the head restraint cannot provide its protective function.<

Active front head restraints In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient severity, the active head restraint reduces the distance to the head.

Do not use seat covers or head restraint covers that could impede the proper

functioning of the active head restraint. Other- wise, there is no assurance that the active head restraint will perform its protective function and it is not possible to take advantage of its injury- reducing potential in the event of a rear-end collision. Have the active head restraints reset after they are triggered in a rear-end collision. Only have this work carried out by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. Otherwise, this safety equipment will not function properly.<

Please contact a BMW center if you wish to have the front head restraints removed

and installed.<

Coupe

Height adjustment

> To raise: pull the head restraint upward.

> To lower: slide the head restraint down- ward.

To reach the lowest position, press the button, refer to arrow 1.<

Front seats: adjusting distance to the back of the head

> Forward: pull up.

> Back: push the button and slide the head- rest cushion toward the rear.

Do not place any objects behind the headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can

impair the proper function of the head restraint.<

C o

n tr

o ls

49

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Convertible

Adjusting height

Move the switch up or down.

Front seats: adjusting distance to the back of the head

> Forward: pull up.

> Back: push the button and slide the head- rest cushion toward the rear.

Do not place any objects behind the headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can

impair the proper function of the head restraint.<

Entering rear Before starting to drive, fold backrests back, otherwise there is the danger of

accident due to an unexpected movement of the seat.<

Coupe: releasing backrest

Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest for- ward. The lever is designed so that the safety belt can be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten the safety belt more conveniently.

Convertible: releasing backrest

The belt system integrated in the seat makes it easier to get in back.

1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest for- ward.

2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has moved into the desired position.

3. After passengers have entered the rear, fold the backrest back and lock it in place.

4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has moved back into its previous position. If you release button 3 before this, the seat stops in its current position.

You can lock the backrest in place when it is folded forward. This is useful, for exam-

ple, when you get into the vehicle while it is parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audi- bly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not need to use lever 1 to release it.<

A d

ju st

in g

50

Lock backrest warning lamp: Lights up when the backrest is not locked. At the same time, a message is

shown on the Control Display.

Safety belts To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on page 45.<

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Fastening Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Releasing 1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in the correct position for adults of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 45.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and passenger seat*

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig- nal sounds. A message also appears on the Control Display. Please check

whether safety belts are being worn correctly.

The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the passenger seat.

Damage to safety belts When subjected to strain due to an acci- dent or in the event of damage, replace

the safety belts, the belt tensioners, and any child restraint systems and have the belt anchor points checked. Only have this work carried out at a BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise cor- rect operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<

Heated seats*

The temperature setting advances one step in its control sequence each time you press the button. The highest temperature is set when three LEDs are lit.

The temperature is reduced and if need be, the heating is switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.

C o

n tr

o ls

51

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

To switch off: Press the button longer.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors The mirror on the passenger's side is more curved than the driver's mirror.

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance of following traffic based on what you see in the mirrors, otherwise there is an increased acci- dent risk.<

1 Adjusting

2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto- matic curb monitor

3 Folding mirrors in and out* Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir- ror and steering wheel memory on page 47.

Adjusting manually You can also adjust the mirrors manually by pressing against the outer edges of their mirror glass.

Folding exterior mirrors in and out Pressing button 3 allows you to fold mirrors in and out up to a speed of approx. 20 mph/ 30 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mir- rors that have been manually folded in back into the correct position. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Before going through a car wash, fold the mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-

erwise they could be damaged, depending on the width of the car wash system.<

Automatic heating Below a certain outdoor temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated whenever the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Tilting down passenger-side mirror automatic curb monitor

Activating 1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror

position, arrow 1.

2. Shift into reverse or move selector lever into position R. The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat on the passenger's side. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle such as a curb when park- ing, etc.

Deactivating Slide switch into the passenger side mirror position, arrow 2.

A d

ju st

in g

52

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

This feature is controlled by two photocells in the inside rearview mirror, one on the front and one on the back.

For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells clean and do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield in front of the mirror, either.

Steering wheel

Adjusting Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-

dent as the result of unexpected movement.<

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four directions.

Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory, page 47.

Easy entry/exit To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel temporarily moves into the uppermost position.

Steering wheel heating*

Press the button.

When the steering wheel heater is operating, the LED in the button lights up.

C o

n tr

o ls

53

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Transporting children safely

The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger

themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening the doors.<

Children always in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Children younger than 13 years of age or with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only

be transported in the rear in child restraint sys- tems which correspond to the age, weight and height of the child. Otherwise there is an increased danger of injury in an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, size and weight.

Exception for front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas- senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are deployed, even with a child restraint system. Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 91.

Installing child restraint systems

Follow child restraint system manufac- turer's instructions for the selection,

installation and use of child restraint systems.

Otherwise, the degree of protection they offer may be reduced.<

On front passenger seat After mounting a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that

the front and side airbags on the front passen- ger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig- gered.<

Seat position Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.

Child seat security

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked against pulling out to secure child restraint systems.

Locking safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.

3. Allow the belt webbing to retract and pull taut against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

T ra

n sp

o rt

in g

c h

ild re

n s

af el

y

54

Unlocking safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt webbing to retract com- pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for Chil- dren.

Follow the system manufacturer's instructions on installation and use of

LATCH child restraint systems in order not to impair their protective function.<

Anchor points for LATCH mounts Before attaching the LATCH child seat, pull the belt away from the region of the child restraint fixing system.

Make sure that both of the lower LATCH mounts have properly clicked into place

and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest. Otherwise, the protective action may be impeded.<

Rear seats

The mounting points for the LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Upper LATCH retaining strap

Convertible For Canadian Customers Only

The following statement is required by Trans- port Canada: This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir- ing the use of a tether strap can be properly secured in the vehicle.

Coupe Only use the top tether-strap mounting points to secure child restraint systems,

otherwise the mounting points could be dam- aged.<

There are two additional mounting points for child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer to arrows.

Placement of tether strap Make sure that the tether strap is not routed over sharp edges and does not

twist on its way to the upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt may not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an acci- dent.<

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraints

3 Tether strap hook

C o

n tr

o ls

55

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4 Mounting point

5 Rear window shelf

6 Backrest

7 Tether strap of child restraint system

Before usage, fold the the head restraint* and if necessary the mounting points into their raised position.

1. Slide the head restraint into the bottom position.

2. Guide the tether strap over the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook to the mount- ing point.

D ri

vi n

g

56

Driving

Ignition lock

Inserting remote control into ignition lock

Insert the remote control as far as possible into the ignition lock.

Radio readiness switches on. Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation.

Comfort Access* With Comfort Access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock in exceptional cases, refer to page 34.

Removing remote control from ignition lock

Do not pull the remote control out of the ignition lock using force, as otherwise

damage may result.<

Before removing the remote control, first press it in as far as possible to release the locking device.

The ignition is switched off if it was still switched on.

Sport automatic transmission The remote control can only be removed when transmission position P is selected: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the radio readiness or the ignition on and off.

The engine is started when you press the Start/Stop button and depress the clutch

if your vehicle is equipped with the manual transmission or the brake if your vehicle is equipped with the sport automatic transmis- sion.<

Radio readiness Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The time and outside tempera- ture are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off:

> when the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> with Comfort Access* by touching the sur- face on the door handle, refer to Locking on page 34

Ignition on All electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The odometer and the trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to page 72.

Please switch off the ignition and the electronic systems/consumers which are

not required when the engine is not running to save the battery.<

C o

n tr

o ls

57

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Radio readiness and ignition switched off All indicator and warning lamps in the instru- ment cluster go out.

Starting engine Do not run the engine in enclosed areas, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust

gases can cause loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, as such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run- ning, select the idling position, or shift the trans- mission into position P and firmly apply the parking brake, otherwise the vehicle can begin to roll.<

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion or repeated starting attempts in

which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.<

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine speed.

Manual transmission Remote control in ignition lock or with Comfort Access in vehicle, refer to page 34.

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into idling position.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Sport automatic transmission* Remote control in ignition lock or with Comfort Access in vehicle, refer to page 34.

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Switching engine off When leaving the vehicle, always take the remote control with you.

When parking, firmly apply the parking brake, as otherwise the vehicle could roll.<

Manual transmission 1. Press the Start/Stop button with the vehicle

stopped.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 56.

Sport automatic transmission* 1. Shift transmission into position P with the

vehicle stopped.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 56.

Before driving into a car wash The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to the following steps:

1. With Comfort Access: insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. Shift into transmission position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

Transmission position P will be engaged:

D ri

vi n

g

58

> after approx. 30 seconds

> if you remove the remote control from the ignition lock

Parking brake The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig- nal sounds when you drive away. The parking brake is applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to apply the parking

brake while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it too firmly. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise, too firm an application of the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the vehicle to swerve.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak- ing action, occasionally engage the park-

ing brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly com- ing to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable. The brake lamps do not light up when the park- ing brake is applied.<

Manual transmission

While shifting in the 5th/6th gear lane, press the gearshift lever toward the right,

otherwise accidental shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could result in engine damage.<

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When pressing the gearshift lever to the left, overcome some resistance.

Sport automatic transmission* In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can also shift manually with Steptronic, refer to page 59.

You can also choose between two driving pro- grams: Normal or Sport, refer to Dynamic Driv- ing Control.

Transmission positions P R N D M/S +

Displays in instrument cluster

P, R, N, D, S1 through S6, M1 through M6

C o

n tr

o ls

59

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The transmission mode and the currently selected gear are displayed.

Engaging transmission position > Do not leave the transmission position P

until the engine is running: interlock.

> With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise the shift command will not be executed: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,

maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.<

Engaging N, D, R

Briefly press the selector lever in the desired direction, beyond a resistance point if neces- sary. Press button 1 simultaneously out of P or into R.

The engaged transmission position is also dis- played on the selector lever.

The selector lever immediately returns to the center position when released.

Engaging P

Press button P.

R Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

P is engaged as soon as you switch off the engine unless N is engaged and with

Comfort Access, the remote control is inserted in the ignition lock, refer to Before driving into a car wash, page 57.<

N Neutral Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car washes. The vehicle can roll.

N remains engaged even after the engine is switched off whenever you leave the

remote control in the ignition lock. This function is useful, for example, in automatic car washes, refer to page 57.<

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are available.

Kickdown Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the increased resistance at full throttle.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Press selector lever toward the left from trans- mission position D: The sport program is activated and S1 through S6 is displayed in the instrument cluster. This

D ri

vi n

g

60

position is recommended for a performance- oriented driving style.

When the selector lever is pressed forward or back, the manual mode is activated and the Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument clus- ter shows M1 through M6.

Upshifts and downshifts are only carried out at a suitable engine and vehicle speed, e.g. a down- shift is not carried out at excessively high engine speeds. The selected gear is briefly dis- played in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

To resume automatic mode, press the selector lever to the right.

Shift paddles on steering wheel You can also shift manually with two shift pad- dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly, as both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the gearshift system switches into the manual mode.

> If you do not shift with the shift paddles and do not accelerate for a certain time, the sys- tem switches into the automatic mode again when the selector lever is in D.

> To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.

> To shift down: press one of the shift pad- dles.

Dynamic Driving Control The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible for your BMW to react in an even more perfor- mance-oriented manner at the push of a button:

> The speed range of the engine is optimally utilized.

> Gearshifts are faster.

> The engine responds more spontaneously to accelerator pedal movements.

> The steering will operate in an even sportier mode.

> In the automatic mode, the 6th gear is not engaged.

Activating system

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Deactivating system > Press the SPORT button again

> Engage reverse gear

> Switch off engine

The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru- ment cluster go out.

Manually unlocking and locking transmission lock In case of a power failure, e.g. when the battery is drained or disconnected, or an electrical fault, manually release the transmission lock, as oth- erwise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot be towed.

Only manually release the transmission lock for towing and firmly apply the parking brake beforehand so that the vehicle cannot roll. Reengage the transmission lock after parking the vehicle at its destination.

C o

n tr

o ls

61

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Releasing 1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever.

3. Reach into the trim-piece opening, arrow 1, and firmly pull the trim piece upward, arrow 2.

4. Remove cover over the opening, refer to 5.

5. Insert a screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 212, into the opening, arrow 1.

6. Pull the screwdriver toward the rear until it is heard to engage, arrow 2, and leave it inserted in the opening. The transmission lock is released.

Locking 1. Pull out the screwdriver upward.

The transmission lock is locked again.

2. Reinstall the cover and the trim piece.

Information on jump starting and towing from page 217.

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Turn signals

Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal

lamp.<

Signaling briefly Press lever to resistance point and hold for as long as you wish to signal.

D ri

vi n

g

62

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn signal flashes three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Triple turn signal"

4. Triple turn signal activation is activated and is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Wiper system

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor

4 Cleaning windshield, headlamps and BMW Night Vision camera*

5 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

Switching on wipers Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.

Normal wiper speed Press once. The system reverts to operation in the intermit- tent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system reverts to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Rain sensor The wiper operation is controlled automatically as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sen- sor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but- ton lights up.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level Turn the thumbwheel 5.

Deactivating rain sensor Press the buttonagain, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash. Failure to

do so could result in damage caused by undes- ired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield, headlamps and BMW Night Vision camera* Pull the lever, arrow 4.

C o

n tr

o ls

63

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The system sprays washer fluid against the windshield and activates the wipers for a brief period.

With the vehicle lighting switched on, the head- lamps and the BMW Night Vision camera are also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter- vals.

Do not use the washing mechanisms if there is any danger that the fluid will

freeze on the windshield. If you do so, your vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For this reason, keep it away from ignition

sources and store only in the closed original container out of reach of children. Otherwise, there is the danger of bodily injury. Always observe the instructions for use provided on the containers.<

Filler neck for washer fluid

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser- voir.

Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.

In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix the washer fluid before filling.<

Capacity Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.

Cruise control*

The concept The cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you set using the lever mounted on the steering col- umn. To maintain the specified speed, the sys- tem brakes if the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill grade. Speed can drop on uphill grades if the engine output is insuffi- cient.

Do not use the cruise control under driv- ing conditions that do not permit a con-

stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions such as snow, rain, ice, loose road surface, and poor visibility. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.<

One lever for all functions

1 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed

2 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and decelerating

3 Interrupting and deactivating system

4 Resuming stored speed

D ri

vi n

g

64

Maintaining, storing and increasing speed Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1: The speed currently being driven is maintained and stored. The display 1 in the speedometer, see below, indicates this regulated speed. Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.

Press lever to resistance point for a longer time: The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system maintains and stores your current speed as soon as you release the lever.

Press the lever beyond the resistance point: The speed is increased to the next fives posi- tion in the mph display or the next tens position in the km/h display.

Press and hold the lever beyond the resistance point: The vehicle accelerates more quickly.

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and decelerating Pull the lever, arrow 2: Functions are the same as 1; the speed is reduced.

Interrupting system Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.

The display 1 in the speedometer changes color.

In addition, the system is interrupted:

> when you apply the brakes, even with the parking brake

> when you shift very slowly, when you shift the manual transmission into idling mode, or when you shift the automatic transmis- sion into the N position

> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti- vated

> when the DSC comes on

Resuming stored speed Press button 4: The stored speed is resumed and maintained.

Deactivating system > Press the lever up or down twice, arrow 3

> Switch off the ignition

The speed stored in the memory is deleted.

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Stored speed

2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

Active cruise control* With active cruise control you can select a desired speed which is then automatically maintained when driving on open roadways and is varied to maintain a selected distance setting to slower moving vehicles ahead.

Active cruise control represents a technological advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjustment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on freeways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Especially on longer trips and in traffic conges- tion, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and responsibly.

In addition to holding a steady cruising speed, if you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active cruise control will, within limits, adjust your vehicles speed automatically so that you can flow with the traffic without having to make con- stant adjustments. If, for example, while cruis- ing at the selected speed, you begin to approach a slower vehicle ahead of you in the same lane, the system will reduce your vehicles speed to the same as that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected distance setting. You

C o

n tr

o ls

65

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

can vary the following distance, which will vary with speed. Based on your selected distance setting, the system automatically decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. In addition, if the vehicle ahead of you slows to a complete stop, the system can follow this action within the given scope and can also accelerate from a complete stop if the vehicle ahead of you drives off again shortly thereafter. During braking, your vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to alert a fol- lowing driver to take action. In addition, it may be necessary for your vehicle to downshift the automatic transmission to maintain the dis- tance setting selected. As soon as the road in front of you has no moving vehicles, the system will accelerate to your desired speed. This set speed is also maintained on downhill grades, however the vehicle speed can drop below the set speed when driving uphill if the engine out- put is not sufficient.

Active cruise control cannot detect stop signs, red lights, or any object that is

stopped or is blocking the road. Active cruise control is not and must not be used as a collision avoidance/warning system. Since this active cruise control system is a new technology and operates differently from con- ventional cruise control systems which you may be accustomed to, it is necessary that you read all of the pages relating to this system before use. Carefully read and observe the information on the system limitations beginning on page 69 to obtain a good command of the system and its range of applications.<

Brake pedal feel When the system brakes and you also depress the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking feel results.

Professional* navigation system If a navigation DVD is in the drive, refer to page 126, within limits the system adjusts the accelerating and braking behavior of the vehicle to the road you are driving on.

To ensure that the system is informed of the current course of the road, always use

the latest navigation DVD if possible.<

When the vehicle position is unknown, e.g. when you leave the map area, this influence of the navigation system is not available.

Applications Please try the system first during sparse traffic and clear road conditions so that you can get used to the system. After you have experience and understand the system, only then use it during normal traffic.

As with conventional cruise control systems, active cruise control in no way reduces or sub- stitutes for the drivers own personal experi- ence, responsibility, alertness and awareness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise control- ling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on highway-type roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly as well as in slow-moving traffic. Do not use the system in city driving; in complex driving situations; heavy traffic such as during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as high- way off-ramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicles speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary, espe- cially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you. Otherwise, driving condi- tions can result which lead to a violation of the law or elevated risk of an accident.

The minimum initial activation speed is 20 mph/ 30 km/h, and the maximum speed is 110 mph/ 180 km/h. However, you can also activate the system while stopped, refer to While stopped, page 67.

D ri

vi n

g

66

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and increasing desired speed

2 Storing and reducing desired speed

3 Interrupting, refer to page 67, or deactivat- ing system, refer to page 67

4 Activating stored desired speed and dis- tance, refer to page 67, or driving off, refer to While stopped, page 67

5 Selecting distance to vehicle driving ahead, refer to page 66

Storing current speed Tap the lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull it, arrow 2.

The system stores the current vehicle speed. It is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

Increasing desired speed Press or tap the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis- played. The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road.

> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the resistance point, the desired speed increases to the next fives position in the mph speedometer display or the next tens position in the km/h speedometer display.

Reducing desired speed Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

These functions are operated in the same man- ner as increasing your desired speed.

Selecting distance

> Briefly press rocker switch downward: Increase distance.

> Briefly press rocker switch upward: Reduce distance.

The selected distance is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4 This distance is set when you acti- vate the system.

C o

n tr

o ls

67

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Use good judgment to select the appro- priate following distance, given road con-

ditions, traffic, applicable laws and state driving recommendations for safe following distance. Otherwise, a violation of the law or risk of an accident could result.<

Interrupting cruise control

Press the lever upward or downward, and with the vehicle stopped also depress the brake pedal. The marking in the speedometer changes color and the distance indicator goes out.

In addition, the system is automatically inter- rupted:

> when you apply the vehicle brakes

> when you shift the transmission

> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti- vated

> when DSC comes on

> when you apply the parking brake

> when you release the safety belt and open the driver's door with the vehicle stopped

> when the system does not recognize any objects for an extended period of time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoulder or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt, refer to page 68

If the system is interrupted, then it is nec- essary for the driver to actively intervene

by braking and steering. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.<

Resuming stored desired speed and distance

While driving Press button 4. The displays appear in the instrument cluster.

While stopped Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, engage position P of the auto-

matic transmission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise the vehicle can roll.<

If a detected vehicle in front of you brakes to a complete stop and your vehicle has also been braked to a complete stop by the system:

> If the vehicle in front of you drives off while the marking 1 for the desired speed in the speedometer is green, your vehicle will accelerate without you having to do any- thing.

> If the vehicle in front of you drives off while the marking 1 is orange, you briefly depress the accelerator pedal or press button 4. Rolling bars in the distance indicator 3 mean that the vehicle in front of you has driven off.

If you are stopped behind a vehicle with the brake pedal depressed and the system is inter- rupted or deactivated:

1. Press button 4 to activate a stored desired speed or select a desired speed with the lever, arrow 1 or arrow 2.

2. Release the brake pedal.

3. If the vehicle in front of you drives off, briefly depress the accelerator pedal or press button 4.

Deactivating system > Press the lever upward or downward twice

while driving.

> When stopped, do the same with the brake pedal depressed.

> Switch off the ignition.

The displays turn off, and the stored desired speed and distance are deleted.

D ri

vi n

g

68

Displays in instrument cluster

1 Stored desired speed

> Green: the system is active.

> Orange: the system is interrupted.

2 Lights up yellow: vehicle detected ahead Display also used for warnings, please read all information on warnings

3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The indicator lights up as soon as the sys- tem is activated

The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has driven off

4 Brief display of stored desired speed

If the display --- mph/--- km/h appears briefly, the conditions necessary for oper-

ation may currently not be met.<

Warning lamps

The indicator 2 continuously flashes yellow. The prerequisites for operating the system are no longer met, as a result of ABS or DSC interven-

tions. The system brakes until you actively take over.

The indicator 2 flashes red; a sig- nal sounds. The system indicates that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. The system can-

not automatically restore the distance to the vehicle driving ahead. However, this display cannot relieve the driver

of the responsibility for adjusting the desired speed and driving style to the traffic conditions.

Radar sensors

1 Long-range sensor

2 Location of the short-range sensors behind the bumper

Heavy rain and also dirt, snow or ice can limit the detection of vehicles ahead. If needed, clean the radar sensor under the front bumper as well as the bumper area covering the short range sensors. When doing so, be particularly careful in removing layers of snow and ice. Do not apply adhesive labels etc. in the area of the short-range sensors.

If the sensor is not aligned properly, e.g. due to damage, the active cruise control cannot be activated.

Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the sensor is incorrectly aligned. A message is displayed if the system fails.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:

FCC ID:

> NF3 ACC2SCU 003YK04001 0000

> BV8SRS24

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

C o

n tr

o ls

69

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and

> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

users authority to operate this equipment.<

System limitations

As with conventional cruise control sys- tems, active cruise control in no way

diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own personal responsibility, alertness and aware- ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise controlling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on free- way-type roadways where traffic is moving rel- atively smoothly. Do not use this system in city driving; in complex driving situations; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway off-ramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/ parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicles speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if nec- essary, especially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you.<

Always remember that the range and abil- ity of the system do have physical limita-

tions. For example, the system may not detect vehicles driving ahead if they suddenly brake heavily in stop-and-go traffic during accelera- tion. The system will not apply the brakes or slow your vehicle when a very slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle or stationary object is in the lane ahead of you, for example when

approaching a traffic light or parked vehicle or when a vehicle is stalled in your lane. Also, the system does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback. It is also possible that the system may not detect smaller moving objects such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering any of these situations as the system will neither automati- cally brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in the distance setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened amount of alertness.<

The system cannot allow the vehicle to drive off automatically in situations that make driving off considerably more difficult, e.g. on steep uphill grades, with a heavy trailer or before raised areas in the road.

Near radio astronomy stations, the system radar is deactivated at speeds under 20 mph/ 30 km/h due to legal regulations.

Be certain to interrupt the system when you pull into an exit lane for a highway

offramp.<

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner on a highway may cause a delay in the systems reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in the

D ri

vi n

g

70

lane next to you. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary.

In addition, the system is interrupted whenever the driver applies the vehicle

brakes, shifts the transmission from drive/D to neutral/N, or deactivates DSC. After any inter- ruption, the system will no longer automatically activate the vehicle brakes, which means the driver must intervene and resume manual brak- ing. You should then reactivate the system only when you are fully aware of the prior speed and distance settings.<

Active cruise control may brake when you reduce the stored desired speed; however, the driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter- vene if necessary.

When you switch off the engine or ignition, active cruise control is fully switched off, too, and any settings you have selected are can- celed.

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle in front of you is behind a stopped vehicle and unexpectedly changes lanes, you must react yourself, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle swerves out of adjacent lanes into your lane, the system does not detect the vehicle until it is completely in your lane.

When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able

to restore the selected distance automatically. This also applies to great differences in speed between your vehicle and vehicles ahead, e.g. when quickly approaching a truck. Once the system has established that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of an accident.<

Behavior in curves

If the selected desired speed for a curve is too high, the system reduces the speed within a curve. However, it cannot detect curves in advance. Therefore, select a suitable speed at the start of a curve.

Because of the limited range of the system, it is possible that in curves or on the peaks and val- leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec- ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to the driver to select a speed that is prudent in view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

C o

n tr

o ls

71

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active cruise control might react briefly to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either case, you can choose to overcome the deceler- ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driver interventions and your responsibility

Anytime the driver presses down on the accelerator pedal, any braking action by

the system is interrupted and the distance indi- cator goes out until the pedal is fully released. As soon as you fully release the accelerator, the system will again control your cruising speed and distance setting. While driving with the sys- tem activated, resting your foot on the acceler- ator pedal will cause the system not to brake even when necessary. Be certain that floormats or other objects on the vehicle floor do not inter- fere with movement of the accelerator pedal.<

While active cruise control is capable of braking your vehicle automatically when

you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to be aware that the ability of the sys- tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce your desired speed sharply. It uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehi- cle braking system. Therefore, the system can- not decrease your speed due to large differ- ences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Example: when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.<

C o

n tr

o ls

O ve

rv ie

w

72

Controls Overview

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock, date

1 Time, outside temperature and date

2 Odometer and trip odometer

3 Press button:

> with ignition switched on, trip odometer is reset

> with ignition switched off, time, outside temperature, and odometer are briefly displayed.

From radio readiness the outside temperature and the time are displayed.

To request the date: Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever, refer to page 78.

Time and date setting, refer to page 76.

You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the Control Display, refer to Units of measure on page 74.

Outside temperature warning If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. There is an increased danger of ice.

Even at temperatures above +377/ +36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-

fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the shade, otherwise there is an increased accident risk.<

Tachometer

Avoid engine speeds in the white-striped advance warning field, arrow 1, if possible.

Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn- ing field, arrow 2. At high revs in this range, the flow of fuel is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature Should the coolant, and with it the engine become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display.

Checking coolant level, refer to page 205.

C o

n tr

o ls

73

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Engine oil temperature*

The general operating temperature is between 1607/706 and approx. 3407/1706. If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes- sage appears in the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/ 70 liters, including the reserve capacity of approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters. You will find infor- mation on refueling on page 194.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve After the reserve quantity has been reached, a message briefly appears on the Control Display; the remaining range is shown in the computer. Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains on the Control Display.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Computer

Displays in instrument cluster

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The following information is displayed in the specified order:

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

> No information

Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is projected based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/ 30 km.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

To reset average speed: press BC button on turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

To reset average fuel consumption: press BC button on turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec- onds.

C o

n tr

o ls

O ve

rv ie

w

74

For different routes You can display the average speed and average fuel consumption for two different routes on the Control Display, refer to the following and to Trip computer.

Displays on the Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Displays on the "Onboard info":

> Cruising range

> Distance from destination

> Estimated time of arrival, provided that a destination was entered in the navigation system*, refer to page 127.

Displays on the "Trip computer":

> Departure time

> Trip duration

> Trip distance

Both displays show:

> The average speed and

> the average fuel consumption.

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed You can reset the values for the average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.

2. To confirm your selection, press the con- troller again.

Resetting the Trip computer 1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Trip computer"

3. "Reset" All values are reset.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure You can change the units of measure for con- sumption, distances, temperature and pres- sure.

C o

n tr

o ls

75

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.

The settings are stored for the remote key cur- rently in use.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date for the next maintenance are displayed briefly with the ignition switched on.

Your BMW Service Advisor can deter- mine your vehicle's current service

requirements by reading out the data stored in the remote control.<

Additional information You can select a display of more detailed infor- mation on the maintenance scope on the Con- trol Display. For operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

You can request more detailed information on every entry.

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Symbols No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or an official inspection is approaching. Please

arrange a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections* Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 77; otherwise, the effec- tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

C o

n tr

o ls

O ve

rv ie

w

76

3. "Service required"

4. " Vehicle inspection"

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.

6. "Date:"

7. Turn the controller until the desired month is displayed, and then press the controller.

8. Set the year in the same manner.

The date is stored.

To exit the menu: Move the controller to the left.

More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 206.

Automatic Service Request* Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your BMW center prior to a service due date.

You can check when your BMW center was notified.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Options"

4. "Last Service Request"

Clock The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting the time To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the time format below.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.

C o

n tr

o ls

77

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

2. "Settings"

Setting the time iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed, and then press the controller.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The time format is stored.

Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting date To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Date:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed, and then press the controller.

5. Create the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Check Control

The concept The Check Control monitors functions in the vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal- function in the monitored systems. This kind of Check Control message consists of indicator

C o

n tr

o ls

O ve

rv ie

w

78

and warning lamps in the instrument cluster, and if necessary an acoustic signal and text messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.

This symbol means that a Check Control message has been generated. The symbol con- tinues to be visible even when the Check Con- trol message disappears after a short time. The warning lamps and text messages are stored and can be displayed later, also refer to page 79.

Explanatory text messages For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the

cause of a malfunction and how to respond; refer to the information provided below.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.

Exit the displayed information: Move the controller to the left.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions occur simultaneously, they are displayed in succession.

Other messages are hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

C o

n tr

o ls

79

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. Press the button longer:

The first stored message is displayed.

2. Press the button: When the button is pressed again, a differ- ent message is displayed.

Via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the text message.

Speed limit You can enter a speed and a Check Control message indicates when you have reached this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing limit iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Limit"

3. "Limit:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.

5. Press the controller.

The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as limit iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Limit"

3. "Select current speed"

4. Press the controller.

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating limit iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Limit"

C o

n tr

o ls

O ve

rv ie

w

80

3. "Limit warning"

4. Press the controller.

The limit warning is switched on.

Settings on Control Display

Language on Control Display

Setting the language iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select the desired dialog.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Warning signal volume You can raise or lower the volume of the warn- ing signals, e.g. the 'Fasten safety belt' reminder, relative to the entertainment sound output. The warning signals have a fixed mini- mum and maximum volume that cannot be dropped below or exceeded.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

> "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol- ume control

> "PDC": volume of the PDC* signal tone relative to the entertainment sound out- put

> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for the 'Fasten safety belt' reminder, rel- ative to the entertainment sound output

C o

n tr

o ls

81

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Brightness of Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Control display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

5. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use. In bright conditions, for example, the brightness control may not be clearly visi- ble.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

82

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

PDC Park Distance Control*

The concept The PDC assists you when you are parking. Acoustic signals and an optical display* alert you to the approach of an object from behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper. The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning first sounds for the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor- ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached

slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth- erwise the physical circumstances would mean that the system warning was too late.<

Switching on automatically The system starts to operate approx. one sec- ond after you shift into reverse or move the selector lever into position R with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Wait this short time before driving off.

Switching on manually

Press the button, the LED lights up.

Manual deactivation Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Automatic deactivation After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is switched off and the LED goes out. You can reactivate the system manually as needed.

Signal tones When nearing an object, the position is corre- spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the dis- tance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:

> if you remain in front of an object that was only detected by one of the corner sensors

> if you drive parallel to a wall

Malfunction The LED in the button flashes and a message appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal- functioning. Have the system checked.

To prevent this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean- ing jets for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm to them.

PDC with visual warning* The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already shown there before a signal tone sounds. The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

C o

n tr

o ls

83

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

System limits Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstacles always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with tow bars and trailer cou- plings, or thin and wedge-shaped objects etc. Low objects already displayed, e.g. curbs, can also disappear from the detection area of the sensors again before or after a continuous tone already sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. For this reason, drive with care; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury or property damage. Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<

Driving stability control systems Your BMW is equipped with an extended array of systems designed to enhance and maintain vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. For information on safe braking, refer to page 120.

CBC Cornering Brake Control When braking during curves or when braking during a lane change, driving stability and steer- ing response are improved further.

Electronic brake-force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system produces maximum braking force boosting and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking maneuvers. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

Adaptive brake assistant* In conjunction with the active cruise control with the stop-and-go function, the adaptive brake assistant ensures that the brake responds even more quickly during braking with the brake assistant.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when starting off and accelerating. The system also identifies unstable driving conditions, such as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions in the indi- vidual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not restrict the additional safety margin with a risky driving style, as other- wise there is a risk of an accident.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up, but not longer

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

84

than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Trac- tion Control and DSC are deactivated together. Stabilizing and drive output promoting actions are no longer executed. The stability-promoting intervention of the active steering* is also deac- tivated, refer to page 89.

A message appears on the Control Display. Please note any supplementary information that appears there.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC Press the button; the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out- put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys- tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces- sary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

> When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start- ing off in deep snow or on loose ground

> When driving with snow chains*

Activating DTC

Press the button briefly; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Malfunction in driving stability control systems

The warning lamp for the brake system lights up yellow, together with the indi- cator lamps for ABS, DSC and Tire Pressure Monitor or Flat Tire Monitor. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. The driving stability control sys- tems have failed. While you may con- tinue, you should remember to proceed cautiously and drive defensively while avoiding full brake applications. The

Tire Pressure Monitor or the Flat Tire Monitor is also malfunctioning. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

C o

n tr

o ls

85

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Display of the previously described malfunction in Canadian models.

The DSC indicator lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. A malfunction has occurred in the

DSC and DTC. The stabilizing actions are no longer available. The vehicle remains opera- tional. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

The brake system warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Display. The brake assistant is

defective. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display of the previously described malfunction in Canadian models.

Drive-off assistant The drive-off assistant enables you to start off conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is not required for this purpose.

1. Hold the vehicle with the brake.

2. Release the brake and begin to drive imme- diately.

After releasing the brake, begin to drive immediately; otherwise, the drive-off

assistant no longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds and your vehicle will start to roll backward.<

Dynamic Drive*

The concept Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti- mizes vehicle stability during cornering and evasive maneuvers.

Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on the front and rear axles. Suspension compli- ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying from performance-oriented during cornering to smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle operation, the system continuously runs through closed-loop control cycles lasting only fractions of a second.

The system assumes operational status each time you start the engine.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor*

The concept The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ- ual wheels during driving.

In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change in the rolling circumference and therefore the rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The system detects this change and reports it as a flat tire.

Functional requirement The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.

The initialization must be repeated after every correction of the tire inflation pres-

sure and after every tire or wheel change.<

System limits The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tire damage

caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time.<

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

86

> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Driving with snow chains*

Initializing system The initialization finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically. The system is initialized after this activation phase.

The initialization process adopts the set infla- tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures.

The system is not initialized when traveling with snow chains*.<

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine - do not drive away.

5. Start the initialization using "Reset". "Activating" is displayed on the Control Display.

6. Start to drive.

The initialization finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time. "Flat Tire Moni- tor active" is displayed on the Control Display.

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamp lights up red. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.

1. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid severe brak- ing and steering maneuvers and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer equipped with run-flat tires, as it was

when it came from the factory, refer to page 200. Continued driving after a flat tire can result in serious accidents.<

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- sure in all four tires.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.<

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values:

> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 94 miles/150 km

> With a full load: 4 persons, luggage compartment full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the

event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking dis- tance and altered natural steering charac- teristics. When towing a trailer, heavy trailers in par- ticular can begin to swing back and forth. Therefore, do not exceed 35 mph/60 km/h, otherwise there is the danger of an acci- dent. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and stop at a suitable loca- tion as soon as possible, otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and

C o

n tr

o ls

87

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

cause an accident. Do not continue driving, but instead contact your BMW center.<

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

The status is displayed.

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*

The concept TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system reports when the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid- erably in one or several tires.

Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth- erwise fault-free operation of the system is not ensured.

Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

System limits TPM cannot announce sudden serious tire damage caused by external influ-

ences.<

The system does not function properly if it has not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite correct tire inflation pressures.

The system is inactive and cannot display a flat tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM electronics, or if TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency.

Status display on Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires.

TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure changes during driving into account. A correc- tion is only required if requested by TPM with the color.

Green The tire pressure matches the learned set state.

"TPM" appears on the Control Display.

One wheel is yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.

All wheels are yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.

Gray The system cannot detect a flat tire.

Reasons for this can be:

> TPM is being reset

> Temporary interference due to systems or devices which use the same radio fre- quency

> Malfunction

Resetting system Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

88

Resetting finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting is continued automatically.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the main menu.

2. "Vehicle Info"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Reset TPM"

5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

6. "Reset"

7. "Yes"

Start to drive. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

8. After a few minutes of driving, the set tire inflation pressures in the tires are applied as the set values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting is continued automati- cally. On the Control Display, the tires are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.

If a flat tire is detected during resetting and applying the tire inflation pressures,

all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis- play. The message "Tire low!" is shown.<

Notification of low tire inflation pressure

The warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. In addition, an acoustic signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer equipped with run-flat tires, as it was

when it came from the factory, refer to page 200. Continued driving after a flat tire can result in serious accidents.<

2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values:

> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 95 miles/150 km

> With a full load: 4 persons, luggage compartment full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of

pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible, otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident. Do not con- tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW center.<

Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. The tires are shown in gray on the Control Dis-

play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can be detected.

A message like this is displayed in the following situations:

C o

n tr

o ls

89

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> In case of a malfunction; have the system checked.

> If a wheel is mounted without TPM elec- tronics.

> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are signif- icantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin- flation has not reached the level to trigger illumi- nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- function indicator lights up, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Active steering*

The concept Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel move- ments. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.

When you are driving in the low speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes very direct. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stability-pro- moting intervention is deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 83.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up yellow and a message is shown on the Control Dis- play. Active steering is malfunctioning

or is temporarily deactivated. At low speed, larger steering wheel movements are required, while the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher road speed range. The stability-promoting interven- tion can also be deactivated. Proceed cau- tiously and drive defensively.

Deactivation Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini- tialization. A message indicates that the feature

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

90

is deactivated. Initialization may take several minutes.

If the message does not go out during the cur- rent trip, have the system checked.

Defect A text message appears if there is a defect. Have the system checked.

Brake force display

> On the left: normal braking.

> On the right: heavy braking.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags

2 Coupe: Head airbags

3 Side airbags

4 Knee airbag

5 Knee airbag

Protective action To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please observe the adjustment instructions on page 45.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The

head air bag supports the head. The knee air- bag protects the legs from colliding with the cockpit.

The airbags are deliberately not triggered in every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci- dents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint system from the vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the wiring or the individual components in the air- bag system. This category includes the uphol- stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the instrument panel, the side trim panels on the doors and on the Coupe, the roof pillars along with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components directly after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns.

C o

n tr

o ls

91

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air- bag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag triggering, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warnings and information on the airbags is also provided on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags The occupation of the seat is detected by eval- uating the impression on the occupied seat sur- face of the front passenger seat. The system correspondingly activates or deactivates the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas- senger side.

The current status of the front passenger airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is

indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front passenger airbags in the following.<

Before transporting a child in the front passenger seat, read the safety informa-

tion and follow the instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 53. The front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side can be deactivated for teenag- ers and adults in certain sitting positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up when this occurs. In these cases, change the sitting position so that the front pas- senger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired status cannot be produced by changing the sitting position, transport the corresponding person in the rear seat. Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items onto the front passen- ger seat unless they are specifically recom- mended by BMW. Do not lay objects under the seat which could press against the seat from

below. Otherwise a correct evaluation of the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<

Operating state of front passenger airbags

The illustration here shows a possible arrange- ment in the Coupe. With some vehicle equip- ment packages or in the Convertible, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags indicates the operating status of the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side depending on whether the seat is occu- pied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deacti- vated.

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a child restraint system intended for the purpose is properly detected on the seat. The front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Most child seats are detected by the sys- tem, especially the child seats required by

the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manufac- tured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.<

> The indicator lamp does not light up if, for example, the system detects a person of sufficient size seated correctly on the seat. The front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

> The indicator lamp does not light up when the seat is empty.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

92

But the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are still deactivated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

From radio readiness, refer to page 56, the warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the operational readiness of the entire airbag sys- tem and the safety belt tensioners.

Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not light up from radio

readiness.

> Warning lamp lights up continuously.

Have the airbag system checked immedi- ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise

there is a danger that the airbag system may not respond in the expected manner in an accident despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<

Convertible: rollover protection system The rollover protection system is automatically activated in the event of an accident or a critical driving situation, extreme inclination on the lon- gitudinal axis, or loss of ground contact. The rollover bars located behind the rear head restraints are deployed within fractions of a sec- ond.

As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated into the windshield frame, the rollover protec- tion system ensures that all vehicle occupants have the necessary headroom.

Always keep the path of movement of the rollover protection system clear.

In minor accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-

dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.<

Lowering If the rollover protection system experienced no impact after automatic activation, then it can be lowered again. No tools are necessary for this purpose.

1. Press the release backward and hold in that position.

2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway down from above.

3. Let go of the release.

4. Press the rollover protection unit down until it snaps into place.

5. Use the same procedure for the second roll- over protection unit.

Have the rollover protection system checked after unexpected triggering.

Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is raised.

No changes of any nature may be made to the individual components of the rollover protec- tion system and wiring. Work on the rollover protection system may only be performed at a BMW center. Non-professional attempts to service the sys-

C o

n tr

o ls

93

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

tem can lead to failure or malfunction. For a system check and to ensure long-term functioning, you must comply with the mainte- nance intervals of the service requirements, refer to page 75.<

Head-up Display*

The concept With the Head-up Display important informa- tion is projected into the driver's field of view, e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to take in this information without looking away from the road.

Switching on/off Press the button.

1 Navigation instructions

2 Display

> Cruise control

> Active cruise control

> Lane Departure Warning

3 Speed

Selecting displays iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Head-Up display"

3. "Displayed information"

4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display.

The information appears in the Head-up Display.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting brightness The brightness of the display is adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the base setting. With the low beams switched on, the brightness can also be adjusted with the knurled thumb- wheel of the instrument lighting.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

94

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Head-Up display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller. The brightness is adjusted.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Notes The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis- play is influenced by:

> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters

> Certain seating positions

> Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis- play

> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting conditions

If the image is distorted, please have the basic setting checked at a BMW center.

Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield complies with the require- ments of the Head-up Display to enable a pre- cise display. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed. Windshield replacement should be carried out by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.

Care instructions You can find valuable information on this topic under Care, starting on page 208.

Only clean the cover of the Head-up Dis- play with a soft, nonabrasive cloth or with

a display cleaning cloth; otherwise, you may damage it.<

BMW Night Vision*

The concept BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system that is designed to provide enhanced vision for certain objects at night. This can be especially helpful for detecting people and larger animals. When objects are detected, the driver may be able to take appropriate action sooner. For example, the driver may identify and detect the presence of persons or animals in the road ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert, slow down or stop, blow the horn etc. The driver can decide which actions are appropriate and then react accordingly.

A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by an infrared camera and a generated image is shown on the Control Display. The resulting thermal image shows the relative heat radiation of the objects present in the camera's field of view. Warmer objects appear brighter and cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is dependent on the temperature difference between the objects and the background and on the amount of heat radiation of the object itself. As a result, it is quite possible that a per- son is not continually recognizable as a person in shape, since the thermal radiation can be affected by different clothing which blocks heat loss. Objects with little temperature difference to the surrounding area, or little heat radiation are less noticeable, for example in cold weather.

C o

n tr

o ls

95

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Any improvement in detection depends on many factors such as the object size and tem- perature compared to the surroundings, or other nearby objects, the visual recognition skills of the driver, weather conditions, and other factors.

Driving hints With the system active, periodically but briefly, glance at the thermal image on the Control Dis- play to notice objects that could be people or larger animals. The glance should be similar to glancing at the rear view mirror. Do not stare at the image for long periods while driving, as this will remove attention from the road. If you notice an object of interest ahead, be prepared to slow down or stop, blow the horn, or take other appropriate action.

System limits The system is designed to supplement but not replace forward vision through the windshield. The driver is responsible for safe driving at night. BMW Night Vision is not designed to be used as a continuous viewing window for driv- ing at night.

No system, no matter how sophisticated, can operate without limitations. BMW Night Vision operation is subject to physical and environ- mental limitations that will reduce the ability of the system to detect and display a clear thermal image. Some of the situations in which these limitations can occur are:

> on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight curves

> in tunnels, as the contrast is inherently low

> when the camera lens is dirty

> in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall

> when displaying very hot objects such as transformers, car exhausts etc.

> when the image briefly freezes during nor- mal system adjustment.

BMW Night Vision's potential benefits can be limited by the driving style of the

driver, the size and relative temperature of the detected objects, dirt or contamination on the camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or fog, and other factors not mentioned here. It will always be the driver's responsibility to drive at a speed and in a manner that recognizes potential hazards and adjust accordingly. BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replace- ment for the driver's responsibility to adapt to visibility and traffic conditions. The forward view illuminated by the headlamps must always be the basis for making safe driving decisions, oth- erwise a safety risk will result.<

Activating BMW Night Vision 1. Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3, refer

to page 98.

2. With low beams switched on:

> Press the button. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the location of the button may differ somewhat.

The image is displayed on the Control Display after a few seconds. Depending on the last mode selected, either the normal or full screen image is displayed.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

96

Due to the system's need to adjust periodically, a still image is displayed at certain intervals for fractions of a second. This is normal and not an indication of a problem.

To prevent driving without headlamps, at a speed of more than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and when dark, the thermal image on the Control Display is only shown when the low beams are on.

Deactivating BMW Night Vision > Press the button.

> Press the button.

> Via iDrive, refer to Selecting settings.

Selecting settings iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to page 16.

1. Activate BMW Night Vision.

2. Press the controller.

3. Open the desired menu item.

> "Brightness"

> "Contrast"

> "Zoom & Curve mode"

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

To exit the menu: The image automatically disappears after approx. 5 seconds.

Cleaning camera

The function of the camera may be affected by heavy rain and fog, dirt, snow or ice on the lens. When this occurs, the displayed image on the Control Display may become gray.

To minimize icing, the camera lens is automati- cally heated. However, it may be necessary to clean the camera lens manually under severe weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid dam- age to the lens, do not use sharp or abrasive instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the lens.

When the windshield is cleaned with the head- lamps on, the camera lens area is automatically sprayed as well. Refer to page 62.

Lane Departure Warning*

The concept This system warns you from a speed of approx. 40 mph/70 km/h when the vehicle is leaving the lane you are currently in on roads with lane demarcation lines. You feel this due to a slight vibration of the steering wheel. The system does not warn you if you signal before leaving the lane. It is best to use the system on well-developed roads and freeways.

C o

n tr

o ls

97

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Switching on/off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

> The two lines 1 indicate that the system is activated.

> The two arrows 2 mean that the system has detected one or two lane demarcation lines from a speed of approx. 40 mph/70 km/h and warns accordingly.

If you activate the system below a speed of approx. 40 mph/70 km/h, a message will appear stating that the system is not active until this speed is reached.

A warning will be canceled:

> after approx. 3 seconds

> if you return to your lane

> if you brake heavily

> if you signal

System limits The Lane Departure Warning cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining the course of the road. If the system issues a warning, do not move the steering wheel with unnecessary severity, as otherwise you could lose control of the vehi- cle.<

The function of the system may be limited in the following example situations:

> in heavy fog, rain or snowfall

> with worn-away, poorly visible demarcation lines, or lines that run together or apart or are unclear, e.g. in road construction areas

> when demarcation lines are covered by snow, ice, dirt or a great deal of water

> in tight curves or on narrow roads

> when demarcation lines are not white

> when demarcation lines are covered by objects

> when driving up close behind a vehicle driv- ing ahead

> with bright counter light

> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or covered with stickers, vignettes etc. in the area of the inside rearview mirror

L am

p s

98

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 Lights off and daytime running lamps* 1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps* 2 Low beams and welcome lamps

3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run- ning lamps*, welcome lamps, Adaptive Light Control* and High-beam Assistant*

If you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off when the light switch is in position 2 or 3. The daytime running lamps have already been switched off at the same time as the ignition.

For this reason, switch on the side marker lamps as needed, switch position 1; otherwise, the vehicle is not lit.

Parking lamps In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

The parking lamps drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for long peri-

ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos- sible to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the roadside parking lamps on one side, refer to page 100.<

Low beams The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control In switch position 3, the system activates the low beams and switches them on or off in response to changes in ambient light condi- tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Light Control* is active. The LED next to the symbol lights up when the low beams are on.

You can also change to the daytime running lamps, refer to page 99. In the situation described above, the lamps switch to the low beams.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams remain on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you

switch on the fog lamps.<

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low beams manually under these conditions.<

Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when parking the vehicle, then when you unlock the vehicle, the parking lamps and interior light- ing remain illuminated for a brief time.

Activating/deactivating welcome lamps iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

C o

n tr

o ls

99

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. "Welcome light"

The welcome lamps are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Pathway lighting If you activate the headlamp flasher after switching off the ignition with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time. You can set the duration or deactivate the function via iDrive.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Pathway lighting:"

4. Set or deactivate the duration.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Daytime running lamps* The daytime running lamps light up in position 0, 1 and 3. If the light switch remains in position 1, the parking lamps light up after the ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps* iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Daytime running lamps"

The daytime running lamps are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Adaptive Light Control*

The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating Adaptive Light Control With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch into position 3, refer to page 98.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control is not active when driving in reverse and points toward the passenger side when the vehicle is stopped.

L am

p s

100

High beams/ roadside parking lamps

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right* You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one side of your vehicle when parking.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Do not leave them switched on for

long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer be possible to start the engine.<

Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction up to the resistance point, arrow 3.

High-beam Assistant*

The concept This system automatically switches the high beams on and off. A sensor on the front side of the inside rearview mirror controls the process. The assistant makes sure that the high beams are switched on whenever traffic conditions permit. This relieves you of the burden of con- stantly switching back and forth and simulta- neously provides you with the best possible vis- ibility. Naturally, you can intervene at any time to switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating system 1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to

page 98.

2. With the low beams switched on, briefly press the turn signal lever in the high-beam direction.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the High-beam Assistant is activated. The system

automatically switches between high beams and low beams, reacting to oncoming traffic, vehicles ahead of you, and sufficiently lit areas, e.g. in built-up zones.

Manually switching between high beams and low beams If you wish or the situation requires, you can intervene at any time.

> If the High-beam Assistant has switched on the high beams, but you wish to use the low beams, just switch on the low beams with the turn signal lever. This deactivates the High-beam Assistant. In order to reactivate the system, briefly press the turn signal lever in the high-beam direction.

> If the High-beam Assistant has switched on the low beams, but you wish to use the high beams, simply switch on the high beams as usual. This deactivates the system and it is up to you to switch back to low beams. In order to reactivate the system, briefly press the turn signal lever in the high-beam direction.

> When the low beams are on, use the head- lamp flasher as usual.

C o

n tr

o ls

101

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

System limits The High-beam Assistant is designed to maximize the amount of time that high

beams can be safely used and to quickly switch back to low beams when traffic approaches. The system cannot completely replace driver intervention when unusual conditions are encountered. For this reason, switch to low beams when circumstances so dictate. Failure to do so can pose a safety risk.<

Below are a few examples of situations in which the system may not react or may only function to a limited degree, requiring personal interven- tion:

> in extremely unfavorable weather condi- tions such as fog or heavy precipitation

> in sensing road users with poor inherent illumination such as pedestrians, cyclists, equestrians, horse-drawn vehicles, railroad or shipping traffic close to the road, and at deer crossings

> in tight curves, on steep crests or dips, with cross-traffic, or with partially hidden oncoming traffic on divided highways

> in poorly illuminated areas and in the pres- ence of highly reflective signs

> in the low speed range

> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or covered with stickers, decals etc. in the area of the inside rearview mirror

> when the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on the front side of the inside rearview mir- ror with a cloth slightly moistened with glass cleaner

Moreover, no system can operate without limi- tations. High-beam Assistant operation is sub- ject to conditions that may reduce the system's ability to recognize the difference between actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and, for example, highly reflective signs, markers, and streetlights. To be on the safe side, the system may periodically interpret these situations as conditions that require low beams. Below are some of the situations in which premature switching to low beams can occur:

> approaching large and/or highly reflective signs

> approaching certain lights, such as drive- way lighting and porch lights

> approaching certain traffic signals

> approaching large reflective markers

In these situations, the system may interpret the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requir- ing a switch to low beams. When the conditions return to normal, the system will reactivate the high beams.

The High-beam Assistant cannot replace the driver's responsibility for complying with state laws on high-beam switching or for adapting to visibility and traffic conditions.

Switching off via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "High beam assistant"

High beam assistant is activated and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

L am

p s

102

Fog lamps

First switch on the parking lamps or the low beams. The green indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

The fog lamps are switched off whenever the high beams are switched on.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on when

you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting

You can control the lighting intensity by using the thumbwheel.

Interior lamps

Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry lighting, courtesy lamps* and sill panel lighting* is automatic.

With the courtesy lamps,LED lights are pro- vided in the outside rearview mirrors to illumi- nate the exterior area around the doors.

To protect the battery, all lamps in the vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-

utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on page 56.<

Switching interior lamps on and off manually Press button 1.

If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry lighting, courtesy lamps and sill panel lighting are to remain switched off continually, press the button for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lamps The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp: You can turn them on and off using buttons 2 located next to the lamps.

C o

n tr

o ls

103

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Climate

Automatic climate control

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air for the upper body area, refer to Ventila- tion on page 106

3 Air to footwell

4 Temperature, left side of passenger com- partment

5 Manual air distribution, driver's side

6 Defrosting windows and removing conden- sation

7 Manual air volume, switching off automatic climate control, residual heat utilization

8 AUTO program

9 Switching cooling function on and off man- ually

10 Temperature, right side of passenger com- partment

11 Manual air distribution, front passenger side

12 Maximum cooling

13 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode

14 LED for residual heat utilization and parked car ventilation system

15 Rear window defroster

C lim

at e

104

16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed

The current setting for air distribution is dis- played on the Control Display.

A congenial climate The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis- tribution and air volume for virtually all condi- tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you only need to select an interior temperature comfortable for you.

The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile settings on page 27.

AUTO program The AUTO program handles the adjustment of air volume and air distribution to the windshield and side windows, in the direction of the upper body and in the footwell.

It also adapts your instructions for the tempera- ture to outside influences throughout the year.

The cooling function is switched on along with the AUTO program. At the same time, a con- densation sensor controls the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possible.

Intensity of AUTO program You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro- gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button. The respective current setting is briefly dis- played on the Control Display when the button is pressed.

Select the intensity of the AUTO program using the AUTO button:

> Low

> Medium

> High

Convertible program* When the convertible top is open, the convert- ible program is active in addition. In the convert- ible program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the convertible top open. In addition, the air volume is increased as the speed increases.

The effect of the convertible program can be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector

is installed.<

Temperature Set the desired temperature indi- vidually on the driver's and front passenger side.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possi- ble at any time of year, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.

When changing between different tem- perature settings in rapid succession, the

automatic climate control does not have suffi- cient time to adjust the set temperature.<

In the highest setting you activate the maximum heating output, regardless of the outside tem- perature.

C o

n tr

o ls

105

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Quickly remove ice and condensa- tion from the windshield and front side windows.

To do this, also switch on the cooling function.

Rear window defroster The rear window defroster switches off after a while. Convertible: the rear window

defroster is only activated when the rear win- dow is closed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper wires are used as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Air volume, manual You can adjust the air volume by turning. You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air volume with the AUTO button.

The air volume is reduced to save battery power. The display stays the same.

Air distribution, manual You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle interior via various programs, separately for the driver's and passenger's side:

> Upper body region

> Upper body region and footwell

> Footwell

> Driver's side: windows and footwell

> Individual program

Selecting program Press the button repeatedly until the desired air distribution of the respective program is shown on the Control Display.

Switching cooling function on and off The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before also reheating it as

required, according to the temperature setting. This function is only available when the engine is running.

The cooling function helps to avoid condensa- tion on the window surfaces or to quickly remove them.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is also switched on with the AUTO program.

Maximum cooling Maximally cooled air is obtained as quickly as possible at an outside temperature above approx. 327/

06 and with the engine running.

At the lowest temperature, the automatic cli- mate control switches into recirculating air mode. The maximum air volume flows out of the vents for the upper body. Therefore, open these vents for maximum cooling.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

You can respond to pollutants or unpleasant odors in the immediate environment by suspending the

supply of outside air. The system then recircu- lates the air currently within the vehicle. During AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off auto- matically.

By pressing the button repeatedly, you can request three operating modes:

> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off the supply as needed.

> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off.

Should the windows fog up in the recircu- lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or

switch off the recirculated-air mode and increase the air volume if necessary. The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time, as the air qual-

C lim

at e

106

ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu- ously.<

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger com- partment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Turn to the right, refer to arrow.

The function can be switched on when the fol- lowing conditions are met:

> up to 15 minutes after switching off the engine

> with engine at operating temperature

> with sufficient battery voltage

> at an outside temperature below 777/ 256

From radio readiness the interior temperature, the air volume and the air distribution can be set.

Switching automatic climate control on and off

1. Turn to the left to minimum air volume.

2. After approx. 1 second, turn to the left again.

You switch on the system again by pressing any button of the automatic climate control.

Ventilation

1 Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close vent outlets

2 Levers to change the vent outlet direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the vent outlets; otherwise, they could be cat-

apulted outwards and cause injuries.<

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance, if the interior has become too warm, etc.

Draft-free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and is not directed straight at you.

Adjusting temperature in upper body region You can adjust the temperature in the upper body region with iDrive.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. "Settings"

3. "Climate"

C o

n tr

o ls

107

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. "Ventilation temperature"

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gas- eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter as a stan- dard part of your scheduled maintenance. You can have more detailed information shown on the Control Display, refer to page 75.

Parked car ventilation*

The concept The parked car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem- peratures.

It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any outside temperature.

You can set two different times for the system to start. The parked car ventilation can also be switched on and off directly. It remains switched on for 30 minutes.

Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current, you should refrain from acti- vating it twice in succession without allowing the battery to be recharged in normal operation between use.

The air emerges through the upper body region vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent outlets must be open for the system to operate.

Switching on and off directly iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The parked car ventilation is switched on.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.

Preselecting activation times iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"

4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

5. Turn the controller: set the hours.

6. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.

8. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

The switch-on time is activated.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control lights up.

C lim

at e

108

The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on.

The respective system is switched on within the next 24 hours only. Please

reactivated it after this time.<

C o

n tr

o ls

109

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control*

The concept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit- ters for various remote-controlled accessories, such as garage and gate or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control regis- ters and stores signals from the original hand- held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem- ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans- mission of the signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 110.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo- ple, animals or objects are within the travel range of the device. Also, comply with the safety precautions of the original hand-held transmitter.<

Checking compatibility If you see this symbol on the packaging or in the manual supplied with the orig- inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to

assume that it is compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

If you have additional questions, please contact your BMW center or call:

1-800-355-3515. Information is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmwusa.com or www.homelink.com. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.<

Programming

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 56.

2. When starting operation for the first time: Press the left and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly. All stored programs are deleted.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/ 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys- tem of the original hand-held transmitter used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit button on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the inte- grated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.

5. To program other original hand-held trans- mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

110

You can operate the device when the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on.

If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter- nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit- ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short time and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this indicates that the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. In the case of an alternating-code system, program the mem- ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the equipment to be set. You will find informa- tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza- tion. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

If you have any additional questions, please contact your BMW center.<

Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes. All stored programs are deleted.

Individual programs cannot be deleted.

Rememorizing individual programs 1. Hold the original hand-held remote control

approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/30 cm away from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys- tem of the original hand-held transmitter used.<

2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote.

3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the command button of the original hand-held transmitter. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.

Glove compartment

Opening

Press the button. The glove compartment opens automatically and the lamps come on.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,

C o

n tr

o ls

111

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

Closing Raise the lid into the closed position.

USB interface for data transmission

Port for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g. music collections.

Observe the following when connecting:

> Do not use force when plugging the con- nector into the USB audio interface.

> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard discs.

> Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

Center armrest

A storage compartment is located in the arm- rest between the front seats. This compartment is integrated into the central locking system and can also be locked separately using the hotel function, refer to page 30.

To open the cover: Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be folded upward.

Depending on the version, the storage com- partment can be equipped with a correspond- ing cradle* for the telephone or mobile phone.

Connection for external audio device A connection for an external audio device is located in the storage compartment. You can, for example, connect a CD player or an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehicle speakers, refer to page 166.

Adjusting height The center armrest can be set in two positions.

Pull the right button: Move the armrest upward or downward and lock it in the desired position.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

112

Storage compartments

Storage compartments in the passenger compartment

Storage compartment behind center armrest

To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge. The compartment contains the cupholderand the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 30.

Other compartments and nets Other compartments are provided in the doors as well as in the front center console*. Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors. Storage nets are located on the backrests of the front seats and in the passenger footwell*.

To prevent the risk of injury during an accident, do not stow hard or sharp-

edged items in the nets.<

Storage compartments in the luggage compartment You have the following storage options in the luggage compartment:

> Storage compartment in the right side trim panel, which is also suitable, if you so desire, for accommodating the vehicle liter- ature.

> Net at the loading lip for smaller items.

Coupe: Clothes hooks

To fold down, press at the top edge.

When hanging clothing on the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's

vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks. If you do so, they could cause personal injury to occupants during braking or evasive maneu- vers.<

Cupholders Use lightweight, unbreakable containers and do not transport hot beverages. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Do not force containers that are too large into the cupholders, otherwise damage could result.<

The compartment of the rear center console contains a built-in cupholder and a removable one.

C o

n tr

o ls

113

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The removable cupholder can be inserted into the side of the center console.

Ashtray*

Opening Press the trim strip of the cover.

Emptying

Press the opened cover beyond the resistance point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for removal.

Cigarette lighter*

Press in the lighter with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical devices

Socket With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the socket due to inserting plugs of different shapes or sizes.

In front passenger footwell

Access to the socket: Fold open the cover.

Ski bag* The ski bag permits safe and clean transport of up to two pairs of standard skis or one snow- board.

You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/ 2.10 m long.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

114

Loading 1. Press the button downward and pull the

filler element forward.

2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats. The zipper facilitates access to the stowed items and drying of the ski bag.

3. Press the button in the luggage compart- ment.

4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic holder to secure it to the rear panel.

To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con- tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten- sioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to do so, it could endanger vehicle occu-

pants during braking or evasive maneuvers. To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at the bottom into the strip and press the filler ele- ment back into place. Make sure that you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<

C o

n tr

o ls

115

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Driving tips This section provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

118

Things to remember when driving

Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin- ues to provide optimized economy of operation throughout an extended service life, we request that you devote careful attention to the follow- ing section.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at changing engine and driving speeds, however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode during these initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch is only at its opti- mized level after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement Observe the break-in instructions again if com- ponents mentioned above must be replaced after subsequent driving operation.

Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on various factors. Through a few simple steps, your driving style, and regular maintenance, you can have a positive influence on your fuel con- sumption and environmental impact.

Removing unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Removing add-on parts after use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks after use. Add-on parts attached to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Closing windows and glass sunroof An open glass sunroof or open windows like- wise increase the drag coefficient and therefore the fuel consumption.

Checking tire inflation pressures regularly Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as needed at least twice a month and before long trips.

An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases the rolling resistance and thus increases the fuel consumption and tire wear.

Driving off immediately Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

119

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Thinking ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To do so, maintain the appropriate distance from the vehicle in front of you. An anticipatory and smooth driving style reduces fuel con- sumption.

Avoiding high engine speeds Use 1st gear only for starting off. Accelerate rapidly in 2nd gear and above. Avoid high engine speeds in doing so and shift into the next gear early.

When you have reached the desired speed, shift into the highest possible gear and drive with the lowest possible engine speed while maintaining a constant vehicle speed.

In general: driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear.

Taking advantage of coasting When approaching a red light, let off the gas and allow the vehicle to coast to a stop in the highest possible gear.

On steep roadways, let off the gas and allow the vehicle to roll in the appropriate gear.

The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting.

Switching off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine at longer stops such as traffic signals, railroad crossings, or in traffic jams. Even having the engine switched off for approx. 4 seconds results in fuel savings.

Switching off functions currently not required Functions such as the cooling function of the automatic climate control, seat heating or rear window defroster draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel. Their influence is particularly pronounced in city and stop-and-go traffic. For this reason, it is a good idea to switch these functions off when they are not really needed.

Having maintenance carried out Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to achieve the optimum economy and service life of your vehicle. BMW recommends having the maintenance performed by a BMW center. Also please pay attention to the BMW maintenance system, refer to page 206.

General driving notes

Closing luggage compartment lid Only drive with the luggage compartment lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust

can penetrate into the passenger compart- ment.<

If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lug- gage compartment lid open:

1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass sunroof. Convertible: with closed top, close all win- dows.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli- mate control to a high level, refer to page 105.

Hot exhaust system As in all vehicles, extremely high temper- atures are generated on the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious property damage as well as personal injury. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- planing, and is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

120

the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread depth of the tires decreases, refer also to Mini- mum tire tread on page 199.

Driving through water Do not drive through water on the road if it is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at

walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi- cle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Using pranking brake on inclines On inclines, do not hold the vehicle in place for a long time by riding the clutch;

use the parking brake. Otherwise greater clutch wear will result.<

Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. In situations that require it, it is best to brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light but consistent

pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Hills To prevent overheating and thus reduced efficiency of the brake system, downshift

to a gear in which only minimal brake applica- tions are needed when descending long or steep downhill stretches. Even light but consis- tent pressure on the brake can lead to high tem- peratures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

The braking effect of the engine can be further increased by downshifting, if necessary all the way down into first gear. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. For information on downshifting in the manual mode of the sport automatic transmis- sion, refer to page 59.

Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in idle or with the engine switched off, other-

wise there will be no engine braking action or support of the braking force and steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area of movement of the pedals and impair their operation.<

Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When vehicle is parked Condensation forms in the air conditioner sys- tem during operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

121

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blowout.<

Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam-

aged.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX lbs. or YYY kg, as otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and unstable driving con- ditions may result.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 200 lbs.: 800 lbs. minus 600 lbs. = 200 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for

transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

Stowing cargo

> Place heavy cargo as far forward and as low as possible, placing it directly behind the bulkhead behind the rear seats.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

122

Securing cargo

> Use the luggage net* or securing straps to hold down small and lightweight luggage and cargo.

> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. Four lashing eyes mounted in the cargo bay are used to secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer to illustration.

> Please observe the special instructions supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.

Position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud- den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces- sary. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 227, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola- tion of traffic safety laws. You should never transport unsecured heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment, as they could fly around and pose a safety hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak- ing or evasive maneuvers. Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo with the upper attachment points for LATCH, refer to page 54; otherwise, you could damage them.<

Pad on base of luggage compartment You can use the pad as needed, for example to transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is washable and has an anti-skid effect.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

123

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Navigation This chapter describes how you can enter

destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your

destination.

N av

ig at

io n

sy st

em

126

Navigation system

General information With the help of satellites, the navigation sys- tem is able to ascertain the precise position of the vehicle and guide you reliably to any desti- nation you enter.

Enter data only when the vehicle is sta- tionary, and always give priority to the

applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi- tions and the instructions issued by the naviga- tion system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in dan- ger.<

Navigation data

General information Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your BMW center.

Depending on the data volume, a data update may take several hours.

> The data are updated while you are driving.

> The update is resumed automatically when a trip is continued after an interruption.

> All functions are available during the trip.

> The data are stored in the vehicle.

> After the update, the system restarts.

> The medium that holds the navigation data can be removed after the update is com- pleted.

Updating the navigation data

Inserting the navigation DVD 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- play.

3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga- tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.

Removing the navigation DVD

1. Press button 1. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Displaying information on the version 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Navigation system version": Information is displayed on the data version.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

127

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from among the following options:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 129

> Last destinations, refer to page 130

> Special destinations, refer to page 130

> Entering a destination on the map, refer to page 132

> Selecting home address, refer to page 130

> Entering a destination by voice com- mands*, refer to page 133

> Destination entry via BMW Assist*, refer to page 131

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Enter data only when the vehicle is sta- tionary, and always give priority to the

applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi- tions and the instructions issued by the naviga- tion system. If you do not observe this precau- tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Entering a destination manually The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns, refer to page 135. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. "Navigation"

3. "Enter address"

The system also supports you with the follow- ing features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town/ city.

> You can skip the entry of country and local- ity if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Entering a state/province 1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

128

To delete letters:

> To delete individual letters: Turn the controller to select , and then press the controller.

> To delete all letters: Turn the controller to select , and then press the controller for an extended period.

To enter spaces:

> Select the symbol.

The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

3. Move the controller to the right.

4. Select the name of the town/city from the list.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names.

2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is displayed.

3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-

played town/city.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Select the digits.

4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/cities.

5. Highlight the postal code: a preview map is displayed.

6. Select the postal code.

Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.

2. Enter a street and intersection as you would the town/city.

After the street you can also enter the intersec- tion or the house number.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names.

2. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis- played.

3. Select the street.

Entering a street without a destination town/city You can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case all streets of the entered country are offered for selection. The related town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can undo this entry. This may be practical if the desired street does not exist in the entered des- tination, because, for example, it belongs to another part of the town/city.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.

4. Change to the list of street names.

5. Select "In" with the country currently dis- played.

6. Select the letters.

7. Change to the list of street names.

8. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis- played.

9. Select the street.

Entering house number You can enter any house number stored in the navigation data for the street.

1. "House number"

2. Select the digits.

3. Change to the list of house numbers.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

129

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Select a house number or range of house numbers.

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination"

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

> Set your "Route preference", refer to page 136.

> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to page 130.

Address book To create contacts, refer to page 184.

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book" Contacts are displayed with addresses if these have been checked as destinations.

If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 185.

3. Select a contact from the list or, if neces- sary, using "A-Z search".

4. If necessary, select "Business address" or "Home address".

Storing a destination in the address book Store the destination in the address book after entering the destination.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

3. Select an existing contact, if available.

4. Select "Business address" or "Home address".

5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First name".

6. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position Your current position can be stored in the address book.

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact".

4. Depending on the selection, select an exist- ing contact from the list or the type of address and enter the last and first name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

130

3. Highlight the entry.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Using home address as destination The home address must be stored as a destina- tion. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home address, page 184.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations The last destinations are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Opening the last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Select the destination.

4. "Start guidance"

Editing a destination Destinations can be edited, for example, to change the house number of an existing entry.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina- tions".

Special destinations You can search for a special destination, e.g. a hotel or place of interest, and start destination guidance to this location.

The search can be narrowed by entering the location and type of special destination.

The scope of information provided depends on the particular set of naviga-

tion data you are using.<

Opening the search for special destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of Interest"

Special destination location Search for a special destination according to its location relative to a locality or route.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

131

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

1. "Search area"

2. Select the location where the system is to search for the special destination:

> "At current location"

> "At destination"

> "At a different destination"

> "Along route"

Special destination category 1. "Category"

2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g. hotels or restaurants.

Category details For some special destinations, additional details can be displayed that are available in the navigation data, e.g. Italian-style restaurant.

"Category details"

Starting the search for special destinations 1. "Start search"

2. A list of the special destinations is dis- played.

> "At current location" Special destinations are listed according

to their distance from the current loca- tion and are displayed with a directional arrow pointing to the destination.

> "At destination", "At a different destina- tion", "Along route" Special destinations are listed according to their distance from the location where the search is being performed.

> Destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as sym- bols. The view depends on the map scale and the category.

3. Highlight a special destination: the destina- tion is displayed in the preview map.

4. Select the special destination.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

Destination entry via BMW Assist* A connection is established to the BMW Con- cierge service, refer to page 187.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Open "Options".

4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Entering special destinations by name 1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of Interest"

3. "Name, A-Z search"

4. Enter the letters. Depending on the distance, the search may take some time. The list can contain a max- imum of 100 entries.

5. Change to the list of special destinations.

6. Highlight a special destination: The desti- nation is displayed in the preview map.

7. Select the special destination.

8. Select the symbol.

9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

132

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Display Points of Interest"

5. Select the settings.

Entering the destination via the map If you only know the location of the town or street, you can enter the destination using the map.

Opening the map 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

A map section is displayed on the Control Dis- play. The map shows the current position of the vehicle.

Selecting the destination 1. Select the symbol. The interactive map is

started.

2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

> To change the scale: turn the controller.

> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

> To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.

3. Press the controller to display additional menu items.

> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

> "Return": return to the map view.

> "Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started.

Specifying the street If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis- plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi- nates of the destination.

Interactive map In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. In

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

133

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

addition, pressing the controller makes further functions available:

> Select a symbol and "Start guid- ance", if necessary.

> "Exit interactive map"

> Map display

> "Display destination" The map section around the destination is displayed.

> "Display current location" The map section around your current location is displayed.

> "Find points of interest", refer to page 130.

Entering a destination by voice commands*

General information You can enter a desired destination via the voice activation system. When entering the destination, it is possible to change between voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti- vate the voice activation function for this pur- pose if necessary.

You can have the possible commands read aloud via {Voice commands}.<

Saying the entries > Countries, towns and cities, streets and

intersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the system language, refer to page 80.

Example: to enter a destination in a US state as a complete word, the system language must be English.

> The town/city, street and house number can be said as a single sentence.*

> Spell the entry if the language region and the system language differ.

> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag- gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

Entering an address* 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for a request from the system.

4. Say the town or city, street and house num- ber in a single sentence.

5. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

6. If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g. the town/ city.

Entering a town/city The town/city can be spelled or entered as a complete word*.

The methods of entry depend on the nav- igation data in use and the country and

language settings.<

2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the town/city.

3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at least the first three letters.

Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit- ies may be suggested.

2. {Enter address}

1. {City} or {Spell city}.

4. Select town/city:

> Select a recommended town/city: {Yes}

> Select other town/city: {New entry}

> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry 2}

> Spell an entry: {Spell city}

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

134

Identical-sounding towns/cities that can- not be distinguished by the system are

compiled in a separate list and shown as a town/ city followed by three dots. If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then select the desired town/city from this list.<

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the town/city is selected and press the controller.

Entering a street or intersection The street or intersection is entered in the same manner as the town/city.

Entering a house number You can enter house numbers up to 999:

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Adding further intermediate destinations

Further intermediate destinations can be added.

Saving a destination The destination is automatically added to the list of last destinations.

Planning a trip

New trip Various intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.

4. Select the symbol.

5. "Enter new destination"

6. Select the type of destination entry and enter the intermediate destination.

Entering further intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip.

1. "Enter new destination"

2. Select the type of destination entry and enter the intermediate destination.

3. Select "Add as another dest.".

4. Select the location where the intermediate destination is to be inserted.

Starting the trip After all intermediate destinations have been entered: "Start guidance"

Storing a trip Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip list.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Store trip"

1. {House number}

2. Say the house number.

3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.

4. {Accept destination}

{Start guidance}

{Add as another destination}

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

135

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Enter the letters.

4. "OK"

The trip is stored in the trip list under the entered name.

Starting a stored trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. Select the desired trip.

4. "Start guidance"

Changing trips

Changing the trip direction Intermediate destinations can be displayed in reverse order after destination guidance is started.

1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Rearranging the intermediate destinations 1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. "Display all trip dest."

4. Select an intermediate destination.

5. "Reposition dest. in the trip"

Deleting an intermediate destination 1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. "Display all trip dest."

4. Select an intermediate destination.

5. "Delete dest. in the trip"

Deleting a trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. Select the desired trip.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".

Word-matching principle The system supports the word matching princi- ple to make it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant response. The user benefits include:

> Names of specific locations can also vary from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another coun- try.

Example:

Instead of the German spelling "Mnchen" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

> When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identifica- tion.

> The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored in the vehicle. The system will not accept non existent names and addresses.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

136

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select the destination.

4. "Accept destination"

5. "Start guidance"

The route is displayed on the Control Display after it is calculated.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.

"Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like while entering the destination and whenever the des- tination guidance is active.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a result, the routes recommended by the naviga- tion system may not always be the same ones

that you would choose based on personal expe- rience.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing route criteria 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Route preference"

4. Selecting a criterion:

> "Fast route": time-optimized route, which is a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads

> "Efficient route": optimized combination of the fastest and shortest roads

> "Short route": short distance, irrespec- tive of how fast or slow progress will be

> "Alternative routes": other suggested alternative routes while destination guidance is active

5. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Where possible, the selected criteria will be avoided on the route.

> Avoid highways where possible: "Avoid highways"

> Avoid toll roads where possible: "Avoid toll roads"

> Avoid ferries where possible: "Avoid ferries"

The setting applies to the current route and to the planning of future routes.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

137

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Dynamic destination guidance "Dynamic guidance" is switched on: The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route.

Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Dynamic guidance"

If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads" or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are

selected, route calculation may take consider- ably longer.<

Route

General information Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, different views of the route are available during destination guidance:

> List of streets and towns/cities

> Map view, refer to page 138

> Arrow view in the Head-up Display*

Displaying a list of the streets or towns/ cities on the route When destination guidance is started, a list of the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis- played. The driving distances and traffic bulle- tins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. Highlight a section.

The section is displayed in the preview map.

Bypassing a section of the route During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the

number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "New route for:"

4. Turn the controller: enter the desired num- ber of miles.

5. Press the controller.

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be bypassed:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendations The remaining range is calculated and gas sta- tions along the route are recommended.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "Recommended refuel" A list of gas stations is displayed.

4. Select a gas station.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Destination guidance via voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off Voice instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

138

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol.

For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a programmable memory key, refer to page 20.

Repeating a voice instruction 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Highlight the symbol.

4. Press the controller twice.

Adjusting the volume of voice instructions* The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces- sary.

2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Map display

Displaying map view You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

The following functions are directly available in the map view:

Information in the map view:

> Time, entertainment source, sound output, map orientation

> Distance from destination, estimated time of arrival, if destination guidance is active.

> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in color.

To show/hide information on the map: Press the controller.

Viewing the map 1. Select the symbol.

2. Select a setting:

> "View facing north"

> "View in dir. of travel"

> "Perspective view"

> "Arrow display"

Symbol Meaning

Voice instructions are switched on

Voice instructions are switched off

Symbol Function

Starting/stopping destina- tion guidance

Switching voice instructions on/off

Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives

Special destinations

Displaying traffic bulletins

Interactive map

Map view settings

Changing scale

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

139

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Press the controller.

Changing the map section Select the interactive map.

> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

> To shift the map diagonally: move the con- troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

Automatic scaling of the map In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the map scale. The map shows the entire range from your loca- tion to the destination.

Settings for the map view The map is shown on the Control Display.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Settings"

3. Set the optimized map view.

> "Day/night mode" Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. When the traffic bulletin map is activated, this setting is disregarded.

> "Satellite images" Satellite images* are displayed depend- ing on availability and resolution.

> "Perspective view in 3D" Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.

> "Traffic Info map" The map is optimized for displaying traf- fic bulletins. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Map view for the split screen display The map view for the split screen can be selected separately from the main screen.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Split screen" The split screen is switched on.

3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen content is selected.

4. Select the map view:

> "Arrow display"

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Map view with perspective"

> "Exit ramp view"

Changing the scale 1. Move the controller to the right until the

split screen is selected.

2. Turn the controller.

Traffic information* You can display the traffic bulletins from radio stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes- sage Channel) of a traffic information service. This information from the traffic information service is continuously updated on the basis of measurement data from traffic control centers and information on traffic congestion. During destination guidance, traffic bulletins that are relevant to areas along the route are automatically displayed and taken into account in the route planning. You can open all traffic bulletins manually via iDrive.

The traffic bulletins are shown in the map view.

Real Time Traffic Information End-User Provisions Certain BMW models equipped with navigation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply:

An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End- User is in material breach of the terms and con- ditions contained herein.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

140

A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net- work") holds the rights to the traffic incident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho- rized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith.

B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa- tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed.

C. The licensed material is provided to license "as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit- ted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, implied or statutory, including, without limita- tion, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular pur- pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade.

D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost rev- enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims,

including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse- quential damages, so those particular limita- tions may not apply to you.

Activating/deactivating reception 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".

In many metropolitan areas you can receive traffic information broadcast by radio stations. The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic management centers and the traffic information is periodically updated. During destination guidance, the traffic infor- mation relevant to your planned route is auto- matically displayed. Whether destination guid- ance is active or not, you can have the traffic bulletins displayed in the map view or in the traf- fic info list.

Traffic bulletins in a list A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via the menu or map view.

Opening the traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.

4. Select the symbol: "Traffic Info" First, the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position.

5. Select a traffic bulletin.

Additional information can be displayed for some traffic bulletins:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Additional information is displayed.

3. Exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

141

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Traffic bulletins on the map When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting. The symbols for the special desti- nations are no longer displayed.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Settings"

5. "Traffic Info map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the location of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are displayed.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc- tion's length, direction and impact are displayed on the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route.

Filtering of traffic bulletins You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be displayed by the system:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories"

5. Select the desired categories.

Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are displayed.

> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route are always displayed.

> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that notify you of potentially dangerous situa- tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hidden.

Traffic bulletins during destination guidance System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected, refer to page 137.

During destination guidance, traffic obstruc- tions on the route are taken into consideration.

Information on sources of great danger, such as wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of the setting.

Displaying traffic obstructions When the navigation system receives a traffic obstruction message and "Dynamic guidance" is not selected, you will be shown certain infor- mation, such as the length of the traffic conges- tion, when you are approx. 30 miles/50 km away from the traffic obstruction. The last possible detour exit is indicated just before you reach it.

This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

Selecting a detour Select the symbol: "Detour".

"Dynamic guidance" is activated for the current destination guidance.

Dynamic route planning When "Dynamic guidance" is selected, the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction. The system will not point out traffic obstructions on the original route. Depending on the road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly cal- culated route may lead through the traffic obstruction.

W h

at to

d o

if

142

What to do if

What to do if

> The current position cannot be displayed? The position is in an unrecognized region, in a poor reception area, or the system is in the process of determining the position. Reception is best when you have an unob- structed view to the sky.

> The destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name? A downtown area cannot be determined for the town or city that has been entered. Input any street in the selected town/city and start destination guidance.

> The destination guidance does not accept a destination? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> The letters for a destination cannot be selected during destination entry? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> The map view is displayed in black and white? When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

> Voice instructions are no longer issued before intersections during destination guidance? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calcu- late a new route suggestion.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

143

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Entertainment This chapter describes how to operate the radio

and CD player and how to create their tone settings.

O n

/o ff

a n

d to

n e

146

On/off and tone

The following audio and video sources share the same control elements and adjustments:

> Radio

> CD/DVD player

> CD changer* > Video* > External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Controls The audio and video sources can be controlled using the:

> Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD player

> iDrive

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11

> Programmable memory buttons, refer to page 20

> Voice activation system

Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD player

1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

> Press: switch on/off When the system is switched on, the most recently selected radio station or track is played.

> Turn: adjust volume

2 Station scan/track search

> Change the radio station

> Select the track for the CD/DVD player, CD changer and certain multimedia devices

3 Eject the CD/DVD

4 CD/DVD drive* 5 MODE: change the audio and video

sources

6 FM/AM: change the radio station wave- band

Switching on/off To switch the Entertainment sound output on and off: Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.

Sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition is switched off. Switch on the sound output again for this pur- pose.

Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the desired volume is set.

You can also adjust the volume with the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Tone control You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are set for all audio sources at once.

The settings are stored for the remote key cur- rently in use.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

147

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Treble, bass, balance, fader > "Balance": left/right volume distribution

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone setting.

4. To adjust: turn the controller.

5. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer* You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Equalizer"

4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Multi-channel playback, Surround* You can select between stereo and multi-chan- nel playback, Surround.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "L7 Surround"

Multi-channel playback, Surround, is simulated when playing back an audio track in stereo.

Surround is automatically activated or deacti- vated, depending on the audio track selected.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.

Volume > "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume

control

> "PDC"*: volume of the PDC signal tone rel- ative to the entertainment sound output

> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for the safety belt reminder, relative to the entertainment sound output

O n

/o ff

a n

d to

n e

148

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default settings.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

149

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Radio

Your radio is designed for reception of the fol- lowing stations:

> FM and AM

> HD Radio* > Weather Band* > Satellite radio*

Selecting a station

Press the knob if the sound output is switched off.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

The selected station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing stations Turn and press the controller

or

Press the button for the corresponding direction

or

Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Selecting a station manually Station selection using the frequency.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. "Manual"

4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.

To store the station: Press the controller for an extended period.

R ad

io

150

Storing stations

Via iDrive 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the controller for an extended period.

5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

About programmable memory buttons You can also store a station on the programma- ble memory buttons, refer to page 20.

1. Select a station.

2. ... Press the desired button for a longer period.

Radio Data System RDS* In the FM waveband, additional information is transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or dis- rupted, it can take some time before the station names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off 1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

HD Radio* Many stations broadcast both analog and digi- tal signals. If a digital radio network is available, these stations can be received digitally and thus with better sound quality.

License conditions

HD Radio technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and For- eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq- uity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "HD Radio"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

This symbol is displayed when a station is being received digitally.

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. Due to time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe- titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

151

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation 1. Select the desired station.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select the substation.

Presets It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use.

The stations can also be stored on the pro- grammable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

Weather Band* Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce- anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) of the US Department of Trade. Weather news flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to 3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a storm, the National Weather Service interrupts the routine weather news and transmits special warning messages instead. If you have a ques- tion about NOAA Weather Radio, please con- tact the nearest office of the National Weather Service. Details are also provided on the Inter- net at www.nws.noaa.gov.

Calling up weather news flashes To operate via the iDrive:

1. Switch on the radio.

2. "Weather band"

3. Select the desired channel.

The station for weather news flashes may be unavailable in some regions.

S at

el lit

e ra

d io

152

Satellite radio

You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have this package enabled.

With this new technology the signal may fail, causing interruptions in reception.<

Enabling or disabling channels

Enabling channels 1. Ensure that reception is reliable. Reception

is usually best when you have an unob- structed view to the sky.

2. "Radio"

3. "Satellite radio"

4. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate- gory.

5. Select the channel.

If the channel has not yet been enabled, then a phone number and the ESN electronic serial number are displayed.

6. Call the phone number to have the channel enabled.

The channels can be disabled again via this phone number.

Disabling channels The channels can be disabled by phone. To do so, have the electronic serial number ESN ready.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio".

3. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate- gory.

4. Open "Options".

5. The electronic serial number is displayed.

6. Call Sirius to have the channel disabled.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

153

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Selecting a channel

Selecting a channel 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All Channels" or the desired cate- gory.

4. Select desired channel.

Storing a channel 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate- gory.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Store Channel"

6. Call up the desired memory location.

The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

Displaying information about another channel Information can be displayed about a channel that is not being played.

1. Highlight the channel about which you wish to display information.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Channel info"

Changing the channel using the button next to the CD/DVD drive Press the button for the corresponding direction. The system changes to the next enabled chan- nel.

Notes If no signal can be received for more than 4 sec- onds, a message is displayed on the Control Display.

Reception may not be possible for certain reasons, e.g. environmental influences or

topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this. The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to tall buildings, near trees, mountains or other sources of radio interference. Reception is usually possible again as soon as the signal is available again.<

C D

/D V

D p

la ye

r a n

d C

D c

h an

g er

154

CD/DVD player and CD changer

CD/DVD playback

Inserting a CD/DVD Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the printed side up. The CD/DVD is drawn in auto- matically. Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take several minutes to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

Playable formats CD/DVD player

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD- RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video

> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD

> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC

CD changer* > CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

Starting playback

Via iDrive Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to page 158.

To start playback if a CD is already located in the player or changer:

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD:

Ejecting the CD/DVD Press the button next to the CD/DVD player. The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

Audio playback

Selecting a track using the button Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track.

*

Symbol Function

CD/DVD player

CD changer

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

155

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Selecting a track using iDrive

Audio CDs 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Select the desired track to begin playback.

CD/DVD with compressed audio files* Depending on the data, some letters and num- bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor- rectly.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Select the directory, if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: Move the controller to the left.

5. Select the track and press the controller.

Displaying information about the track* If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

> Artist

> Album title

> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD

> Track file name

Random play sequence The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played once in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Open "Options".

C D

/D V

D p

la ye

r a n

d C

D c

h an

g er

156

5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the directories and the tracks contained therein are played back in random sequence.

Random mode is switched off if the audio source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

Automatic repeat* Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are repeated automatically.

Video playback*

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Starting playback For your own safety, the video image is only dis- played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, and in some national-market versions only with the parking brake applied.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a DVD with video content.

4. "DVD menu"

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.

4. "Select track"

5. Select the desired track.

The CD/DVD is started.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South Amer- ica, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

157

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Video menu To open the Video menu:

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis- played.

The Video menu is displayed:

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

video menu.

2. "DVD menu" The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

> To select menu items: move and press the controller.

> To change to the Video menu: turn the con- troller and select "Back".

DVD/VCD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on your DVD.

Language* 1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

Subtitles* Subtitles can be selected if they are contained on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Subtitles"

4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis- play subtitles".

Brightness, contrast, color 1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Display settings"

Symbol Function

Open the DVD menu*

Start playback

Pause

Stop

Next chapter/next track

Previous chapter/previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

C D

/D V

D p

la ye

r a n

d C

D c

h an

g er

158

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed, and then press the controller.

Zoom Display the video image on the full screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Zoom mode"

Selecting track DVD video:

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Select title"

5. Select the desired track.

VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track"

2. Select the desired track.

Camera angle* The camera angle depends on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Viewing angle"

5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

CD changer* The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in the glove compartment.

Removing CD magazine To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or remove them from it, you must first remove the magazine from the CD changer:

Press button 2: the CD magazine 1 slides out.

Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be read in again.

Inserting/removing CDs into/from the CD magazine When inserting or removing CDs, remember to hold them by their edges, taking care to avoid touching the data side with its reflective CD memory surface.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

159

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Inserting CDs: Insert one CD into each compartment of the magazine with the labeled side up.

Removing CDs: Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.

Inserting CD magazine

Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in the direction of the arrow.

The CD changer reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

Notes BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result.

Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other- wise the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD may jam and no longer eject.<

General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this may be due to one of the following reasons.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data-cre- ation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois- ture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

C D

/D V

D p

la ye

r a n

d C

D c

h an

g er

160

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro- tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

161

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Music collection

Storing music Music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection in the vehi- cle and played from there.

> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com- pressed audio format when they are stored. If available, information on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.

> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/ DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi- cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Files are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC formats. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored in the vehicle but cannot be played back.

Regularly back up the music data; other- wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on

the hard disc.<

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry stan- dard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may prac- tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc., for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo, the logo typeface and the "powered by Gracenote" logo are trade marks of Gracenote.

Storing from CDs/DVDs Data can only be stored from CDs/DVDs on the CD/DVD player.

1. Insert the CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "CD/DVD"

4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed. The tracks are stored and played back in sequence out of the music collection.

Observe the following during the storage pro- cess: Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources with- out interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD that have already been stored can also be called up.

Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

M u

si c

co lle

ct io

n

162

3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing"

The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

4. "Continue storing"

Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of the track at which storage was interrupted.

Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor- mation is available in the vehicle database or on the CD.

To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be con- nected to the USB interface in the glove com- partment.

> Suitable devices: USB mass storage devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.

> Unsuitable devices: USB hard discs, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with multi- ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.

Data can only be stored from a USB device via the USB interface in the glove

compartment.<

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter- face in the glove compartment.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "Music collection"

4. Open "Options".

5. "Music data import/export"

6. "Import music (USB)"

Music, playing

Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Music search"

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

163

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

4. Select the desired category.

5. To select the desired entry:

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry.

or

> Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select additional categories if desired. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play"

Restarting the music search "New search"

Music search by voice* For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 22.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

To select a track directly:

Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in one sentence.

Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search or the album selected last.

1. "Current playback"

2. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50 List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Top 50"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates. Symbols indicate the format.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Select the desired album.

2. {Music search}

3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select artist}.

4. Say the desired entry in the list.

5. Select additional categories if desired.

{Title }

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

M u

si c

co lle

ct io

n

164

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.

4. To select tracks, change directories if needed. To go up one level in the directory, move the controller to the left.

Random play sequence All tracks of the selection are played back in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album The name of the album, if available, is automat- ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is unknown, it can be changed later if needed.

An album cannot be renamed while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the album.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the album.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete album"

Deleting a directory and track A track cannot be deleted while it is being played back.

A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played back.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the directory or track.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".

Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Free memory"

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

165

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Music collection

Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device.

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur- ing a long trip.

1. Start the engine.

2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter- face in the glove compartment.

3. "CD/Multimedia"

4. "Music collection"

5. Open "Options".

6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Restoring the music collection in the vehicle

When storing music from the USB device, the existing music collection in the vehi-

cle is replaced.<

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Music data import/export"

5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete music collection"

E xt

er n

al d

ev ic

es

166

External devices

AUX-IN port You can connect an external audio device, e.g. an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi- cle speakers. The sound can be adjusted via iDrive.

Connecting Lift up the center armrest.

Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm

To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to the AUX-IN port.

Starting audio playback Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track. Operate the system on the audio device.

Via iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. If applicable, "External devices"

3. "AUX front"

Adjust volume The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. If applicable, "External devices"

3. "AUX front"

4. "Volume"

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

USB audio interface*/ additional connection of music player in mobile phone* It is possible to connect external audio devices/ mobile phones. They can be operated on the iDrive. The sound is played back on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Connectors for external devices > Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player, USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio inter- face.

> Connection via snap-in adapter*, refer to page 182; when equipped with an addi- tional connection of the music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone/mobile phones. Playback is only possible if an audio device/mobile phone is not con- nected to the USB audio interface.

Due to the large number of different audio devices/mobile phones available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio device/ mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

167

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile phones at your BMW center.

Audio files The system can play back common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, as well as playback lists in the M3U format.

Connecting via the USB audio interface Lift up the center armrest.

Apple iPod/iPhone To connect the device, use the special cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available from your BMW center. The cable adapter is required for a flawless connection.

USB device To connect the device, use a flexible adapter cable to protect the USB inter-

face and your USB device against physical damage.<

Connect the USB device to the USB audio interface.

After connecting for the first time, the informa- tion of all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) and the playback lists of the USB device are trans- ferred to the vehicle. This process can take some time. The time required is dependent on the USB device and on the number of tracks.

During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Information from up to four USB devices can be stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000 tracks.

If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than 16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist- ing tracks may be deleted.

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be

played.<

Starting audio playback If the audio device has a device name, this will be displayed if possible.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol. The name of the audio device may appear.

The playback starts with the first track. When an Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in adapter and an audio device is connected to the AUX-IN port at the same time, the audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.

Information about the track If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

> Artist

> Album title

> Number of tracks

> Track file name

Track search You can call up the tracks via the playback lists and information. With USB devices you can also call up the tracks via the file directory.

Selection is possible via:

> Playback lists

E xt

er n

al d

ev ic

es

168

> Information: type of music, artist, album, track

> Additionally for USB devices: file directory, composer

Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet.

Starting a track search 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol. The name of the audio device may appear.

4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Art- ist".

All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z search" can be used to find specific entries.

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired entry.

> Select the desired entry from the list.

5. Select additional categories if desired.

The tracks found are listed. Not all catego- ries need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

6. "Start play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists To open playback lists:

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Current playback"

Random play sequence You can play back the tracks of the selected list in random sequence, e.g. all tracks of an artist.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

Notes Do not subject the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g.

extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper- ating instructions of the audio device. Other- wise, the audio device can be damaged and the resulting distraction can reduce road safety while driving.<

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, proper playback cannot always be ensured.

Connecting instructions > The connected audio device is supplied

with a current of max. 500 mA if this is sup- ported by the device. Therefore, do not connect the device to the power socket in the vehicle.

> Do not force the plug into the USB interface.

> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard discs.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

169

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

> Do not use the audio interface to recharge external devices.

Communications This chapter summarizes how to operate your mobile phone using iDrive or voice commands

and how to use BMW Assist or BMW TeleService.

T el

ep h

o n

e

172

Telephone

The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via the iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel or using voice commands*.

A mobile phone that has been paired once is automatically detected again with the engine running or the ignition switched on as soon as it is in the vehicle interior. The logon data of up to four mobile phones can be stored simulta- neously. If several mobile phones are detected simultaneously, the respective last mobile phone paired can be operated via the vehicle.

Using a phone in your vehicle

Using snap-in adapter* The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone cradle, enables the battery to be charged and the mobile phone to be connected to the exter- nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures improved network reception and a consistent voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen- ter which mobile phones snap-in adapters are offered for.

For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emer- gency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate operating instructions for a detailed description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:

Only make entries when traffic conditions allow you to do so. Do not hold the mobile

phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being distracted

can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Suitable mobile phones Ask your BMW center which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package or which mobile phones snap-in adapters are available for. These mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Manual with a certain software version. Malfunctions can occur with other mobile phones.

Operating options You can operate the mobile phoneusing:

> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

> iDrive, refer to page 16

> Voice commands*, refer to page 179

> Programmable memory buttons, refer to page 20

Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth- erwise malfunctions may result.

Commissioning

Pairing mobile phone in vehicle The following prerequisites must be met:

> Compatible mobile phone: The mobile phone is supported by the full preparation package mobile phone. Information on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth

> The mobile phone is ready to operate.

> Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to page 174, and on the mobile phone.

*

173

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

> Depending on the mobile phone, certain settings may be necessary on the mobile phone, e.g. via the following menu items:

> Bluetooth activated

> Connection must be allowed without requiring further confirmation

> Reconnect

> Depending on the mobile phone model, the setting energy saving mode can, for exam- ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the paired mobile phone.

> For pairing, define a 4- to 16-digit number of your choice as the Bluetooth Passkey, e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number offers better protection against unautho- rized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no longer required following successful pair- ing.

> The ignition is switched on.

Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi- cle stopped, otherwise the passengers

and other road users can be endangered due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the driver.<

Switching on ignition 1. Insert the remote control as far as possible

into the ignition lock.

2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/ Stop button without depressing the brake or clutch pedal.

Preparation via iDrive 3. "Telephone"

4. "Bluetooth"

5. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.

Preparation with mobile phone 6. Additional operations must be carried out

on the mobile phone and differ depending on the model, refer to the operating instruc- tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con- nect or pair under Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

Pairing Depending on your mobile phone, you will first be requested consecutively via the display of your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue- tooth passkey you specified.

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, approx. 30 seconds are available for entering the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and on the Control Display.

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Following the initial pairing > The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

> As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmitted to your vehicle. This transmis- sion is dependent on your mobile phone, refer to the operating instructions of the

T el

ep h

o n

e

174

mobile phone if necessary, and can take several minutes.

> Four mobile phones can be paired.

> Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a secure connection, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

If not all phone book entries are displayed:

> Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.

> It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

Checking if pairing is unsuccessful > Is the mobile phone supported by the

mobile phone preparation package? Infor- mation on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth.

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on the mobile phone display and via iDrive.

> Have you required longer than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat the pairing procedure.

> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con- nections with other devices on the mobile phone.

> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the mobile phone off and then on again or disconnect the power supply.

> Repeat the pairing procedure.

> If all items on the list have been checked and the mobile phone still cannot be paired, please contact Customer Relations.

Connecting a particular mobile phone If more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is connected. A different mobile phone can be connected by selecting it.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth"

3. Select the desired mobile phone.

Unpairing the mobile phone from the vehicle 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth"

3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be unpaired.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Remove phone from list"

The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list. The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are also deleted.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth technology is not approved in all countries. Observe the applicable local

regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue- tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com- puter.<

175

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth"

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.

This volume for the hands-free system is main- tained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions via iDrive:

> Accepting/refusing a call

> Dialing phone numbers

> Dialing phone numbers from the phone book

> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of received calls

> Ending a call

When the ignition is switched off or in radio readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control out of the ignition switch, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for sev- eral minutes.

Speech quality If the person you are talking to cannot under- stand you well, this may be due to excessively loud background noises. The full preparation package mobile phone can compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:

> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing the air volume of the automatic climate control or pointing the opened front vent outlets downward

> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys- tem.

Requirements > The logon data of the mobile phone are

stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to operate.

> The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi- cle.

Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num- ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel

T el

ep h

o n

e

176

or

"Accept"

Rejecting a call "Reject" The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. Select an active call.

Dialing phone numbers 1. "Telephone"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Select this symbol to establish the con- nection

or Press the button on the steering wheel.

The phone number can also be entered using voice commands*, refer to page 179.

For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your provider.

Calls with multiple parties You can switch between calls and connect two calls to a single conference call. These func- tions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function may need to be enabled by the service provider and the mobile phone may have to be set up accordingly.

If a second call comes in during an active call, you will hear a call waiting signal.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish another call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

177

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

Switching between two calls, toggling > Active call: indicated by a red handset

> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset

To switch to the call on hold, select this hand- set.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele- phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended.

Phone book The phone book accesses the contacts* and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Phone book"

All contacts with a phone number are displayed. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Calling a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

A connection is established immediately if calling contacts with one phone number.

For contacts with several phone numbers:

2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established.

Editing a contact The entries in the contacts can be changed. When a contact from the mobile phone is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

Redialing The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored.

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a des- tination.

Mobile phone

T el

ep h

o n

e

178

Dialing the number via iDrive 1. "Telephone"

2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry. The connection is established.

Deleting entries 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. "Store in vehicle"

Received calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis- played.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Received calls"

Dialing a number Select an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting entries 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight an entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. "Store contact"

Messages Different types of messages can be displayed:

> My Info messages from the BMW Assist portal

> Messages from the BMW Concierge ser- vice

Displaying messages 1. "Telephone"

2. "Messages"

3. Select the desired message.

179

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

My Info To start destination guidance:

1. Select the message that contains the desired destination.

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Dial the number in the message:

1. Select the message that contains the desired number.

2. "Call"

Messages from the concierge service To use the address in destination guidance*:

1. Select the message.

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.

To dial a phone number:

1. Select the message.

2. "Call"

To store the address:

1. Select the message.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Deleting messages 1. Select the message to be deleted.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete message"

Switching between the mobile phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to hands-free system* You can continue calls begun outside the Blue- tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free system when the motor is running or the igni- tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically changes over to the hands-free mode.

For mobile phones that do not automatically change over to the hands-free mode:

Depending on the mobile phone model used, the conversation can be continued via the hands-free system if necessary. Follow the instructions displayed on the mobile phone dis- play, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.

From hands-free system to mobile phone When you telephone via the hands-free system, you can also continue the call via the mobile phone if necessary, depending on the mobile phone model. Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper- ating instructions of your mobile phone.

Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth link, refer to page 174.

Depending on your mobile phone model, poor reception of the wireless communications net- work can result in the system changing from the hands-free system to the mobile phone.

Operation by voice*

The concept > You can operate your mobile phone without

having to remove your hands from the steering wheel.

> Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The voice

T el

ep h

o n

e

180

activation system supports you by making announcements and asking questions.

> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

Requirements The same prerequisites as for operation via iDrive apply, refer to page 175.

Voice commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel. An acoustic signal indicates that you can say commands.

2. Say the command.

Ending/canceling operation by voice Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or

In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name rather than a command, canceling is only possi- ble using the button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word. You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you:

The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.

You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

Using alternative commands Often there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:

Example: Dialing phone numbers To start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Setting volume of instructions You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:

Turn the knob during instructions.

This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to mini- mum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

{Cancel}.

{Help}.

{Dial name} or {Name}.

You say The voice control answers

{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

For example {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment: {{123 456 7890. Continue ?}}

{Dial} {{Dialing number}}

181

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting phone number After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.

The command {Correct number} can be repeated as often as you like.

Deleting phone numbers

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Redialing To redial the phone number dialed last:

Voice phone book Operating by voice command requires a per- sonal voice phone book.

The entries must be entered using voice com- mands and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. In this case, it is not possible to use voice command either to call phone num- bers stored in the mobile phone or to store new numbers. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An entry always consists of a name and phone number.

Creating and editing a voice phone book Store entry:

An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

Delete entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice phone book.

Delete all entries:

{Delete phonebook} deletes all entries in the phone book.

Listen to the entries and select:

You can have all entries in your voice phone book read aloud in the order in which they were entered and select a specific entry to establish a connection:

1. {Dial number}.

2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus} and then the country code.

3. {Dial}.

{Correct number}. The digits are deleted.

{Delete}.

{Redial}.

1. {Save name}.

2. Say the name. The spoken length of the names in the phone book must not exceed approx. 2 seconds.

3. Say the phone number after being requested to do so by the system.

4. To store the phone number: {Save}.

1. {Delete name}. The dialog for deleting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phonebook}. The dialog for deleting phone book is opened.

2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.

1. {Read phonebook}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened.

2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry is read aloud.

T el

ep h

o n

e

182

Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

Notes

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini- tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa- tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection. Use the SOS but- ton* instead, refer to page 216.

Important for voice commands For voice commands, keep the following in mind:

> Say the commands, numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha- sis and speed.

> Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

> Keep the doors, windows, glass sunroof* or convertible top* closed to prevent interfer- ence from ambient noise.

> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Inserting/removing the snap- in adapter* 1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter: Press button 1.

Inserting mobile phone 1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile

phone's antenna connector if necessary, so

1. {Dial name}. The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

183

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.

2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons facing upward toward the electrical connec- tions and press down until it engages.

The mobile phone's battery is charged from radio readiness or with the steering unlocked.

To conserve vehicle battery power, avoid using the mobile phone when the ignition

is switched off.<

Removing mobile phone

Press button.

C o

n ta

ct s

184

Contacts

You can create and edit contacts. The contacts from the mobile phone* are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be used as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

New contact 1. "Contacts"

2. "New contact"

3. If the entry fields are still filled with previous entries, select "Delete input fields".

4. To fill in the entry fields: Select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Enter the text.

If the vehicle is equipped with a navi- gation system, it is only possible to

enter addresses that are contained in the navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all addresses.<

6. If applicable, "Store"

7. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying a contact as the home address A contact can be stored as the home address. It is placed at the top of "My contacts".

1. Create a new contact.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as home address"

If the home address is deleted, only the content of the home address entry is deleted and not the entry itself.

My contacts A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the mobile phone*.

Displaying contacts "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z

*

185

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor- age location of the contacts:

Displaying the detailed view* Select the desired contact. All fields that have been filled in for that contact are displayed.

Selecting a contact as the navigation destination 1. "My contacts"

2. Select the desired contact.

3. Select the desired address.

Contacts from the mobile phone* may contain addresses that do not match the navigation data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot be used for destination guidance. In this case: Manually correct the address.

Checking the address as a destination* An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con- tained in the vehicle. An address that is stored on the mobile phone can be corrected to match to the navigation data.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

After an address has been corrected, the con- tact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

Dialing a phone number* 1. "My contacts"

2. Select the desired contact.

3. Select the desired phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. "My contacts"

2. Select the desired contact.

3. "Edit contact"

4. Change the entries.

5. Move the controller to the left.

6. "Yes"

If a contact from the mobile phone* is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi- cle, and only this copy is displayed.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone* cannot be deleted.

1. "My contacts"

2. Highlight the contact.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a desti- nation.

Mobile phone*

B M

W A

ss is

t

186

BMW Assist

BMW Assist* BMW Assist provides a number of different ser- vices. For example, the position data of the vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center when an Emergency Request* is sent.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi- vidually agreed contract.

After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist sys- tem has been deactivated, no BMW Assist ser- vice will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after sign- ing a new contract.

Requirements > The installed BMW Assist system is logged

on to a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the ser- vices.

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.

> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.

> The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Activation must be completed.

> BMW Assist is activated.

Offered services > Emergency Request: when you press the

SOS button, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Automatic collision notification: under cer- tain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW

Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Enhanced roadside assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this time.

> BMW Customer Relations: connection with Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

> TeleService: data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmit- ted to your BMW center, either automati- cally before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.

> Remote door unlock: the BMW Assist Response Center provides assistance if, for example, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.

> Stolen vehicle recovery: after you report to the police that your vehicle was stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can deter- mine its position.

> In addition to these services, the optional Convenience Plan offers a concierge ser- vice and information for route planning, traf- fic and weather. A limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center with Critical Calling, such as when the mobile phone is not available or dis- charged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.

TeleService* TeleService supports communication with your BMW center.

> Data on the vehicle's service requirements can be sent directly to the BMW center. In this way, the BMW center can plan its work

*

187

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.

> In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance*.

> The service varies by country.

> Connection costs may ensue.

> Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements > BMW Assist is activated.

> Wireless reception is available.

> The engine is running.

Concierge service* When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you can obtain information about, for example, res- taurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive the corre- sponding telephone numbers and addresses.

You can then dial a phone number directly or use an address for destination guidance*.

Starting the concierge service 1. "BMW Assist"

2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service"

A voice connection is established to the BMW Concierge service.

You are connected to the BMW Concierge ser- vice to obtain the required information. You can then have the phone number and address sent to you and, for example, use it for destination guidance in the navigation system. Many hotels

can be booked directly through the BMW Assist concierge service. When an information mes- sage is received, a list of the received messages is displayed automatically. Open the message via the message list, refer to page 178.

Roadside Assistance You can call Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group should you require help in the event of a breakdown.

Starting Roadside Assistance

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist"

2. "Roadside Assistance"

Roadside Assistance number is displayed.

3. Select the number. If a mobile phone* is paired, a connection is established to BMW Roadside Assistance.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist"

2. "Roadside Assistance"

B M

W A

ss is

t

188

3. "Start service"

TeleService Diagnosis* TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. TeleService Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and termination of the voice connection.

TeleService Help* BMW TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assis- tance via wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and termination of the voice con- nection.

Starting TeleService Help 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. The engine is running.

4. "TeleService Help"

After completion of TeleService Help, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assis- tance.

Activating BMW Assist* If the services included in a valid BMW Assist subscription are not displayed, they may need to be activated.

1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its current position. Reception is usually best

when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. "Activate BMW Assist"

Activation may take several minutes. If another menu is opened, activation continues running in the background.

BMW Search* BMW Search is an online portal that makes cer- tain services available for use in your vehicle, e.g. information on restaurants along your route.

License conditions:

This product contains NetFront Browser soft- ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun- tries.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements > Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan.

> The vehicle is located within wireless net- work coverage.

> The date setting on the Control Display is current.

Starting BMW Search 1. "BMW Assist"

2. "BMW Search"

189

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

3. Select "OK", if necessary.

The BMW Search start page is displayed.

Using BMW Search To select and display content:

> Turn the controller to highlight an element.

> Press the controller to display an element.

Opening the start page 1. Open "Options".

2. "Home"

Loading a new page 1. Open "Options".

2. "Reload"

Cancel 1. Open "Options".

2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations

At a glance Contact BMW Customer Relations for informa- tion on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist"

2. "Customer Relations"

3. "Start service"

A voice connection is established to BMW Cus- tomer Relations.

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist"

2. "Customer Relations"

The Customer Relations phone number is dis- played. If the vehicle is equipped with the mobile phone preparation package, a voice connection is established.

Service Request* At a glance You can send a request to your BMW center to arrange a service appointment. The TeleSer- vice data are transmitted during the Service Request. If possible, your BMW center will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request 1. "BMW Assist"

2. "Service Request"

3. "Start service"

B M

W A

ss is

t

190

Automatic Service Request* The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW center prior to the service deadline. If possible, the center will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged.

You can check when the BMW center was noti- fied.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Last Service Request"

Data transfer* The status of the data transfer is displayed.

1. "BMW Assist"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Data transfer"

Service status*

Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle. This function can be called up via "Options".

1. "BMW Assist"

2. Open any menu.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Service status"

5. "Available services"

Activating BMW Assist If the services included in a BMW Assist sub- scription are not displayed, they may need to be activated.

"Activate BMW Assist"

191

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Mobility This section helps you maintain your car's

mobility by supplying important information on vital topics, including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance and breakdown assistance.

R ef

u el

in g

194

Refueling

Switch off the engine before refueling; otherwise no fuel can be filled into the

tank and a message is displayed.<

When handling fuel, always observe all applicable precautionary measures and

regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con- tainers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<

Fuel filler flap

To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap.

Unlocking manually

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can release the fuel filler flap manually:

In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.

Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels, follow the safety precautions posted at the filling station.

Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.<

Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler nozzle during refueling; otherwise this

> results in premature pump shutoff

> can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuel- vapor recovery system

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters, including approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters reserve capacity.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Fuel filler cap

Closing Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is a clearly audible click.

Do not crush the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly

seal and fuel vapors can escape.<

A message* is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

M o

b il

it y

195

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Fuel specifications Never used leaded gasoline; it will perma- nently damage the catalytic converter.

Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85% ethanol, or Flex Fuel. Otherwise permanent damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys- tem will result.<

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI rating is 87.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no affect on the engine life.

Do not use gasoline below the specified minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-

age can result.<

Use high-quality brands Field experience has demonstrated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composi- tion, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in problems relating to drivability and start-

ing, and to a tendency to stall, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

196

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure

Information for your safety The condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only to the tire's service life, but also to driving com- fort and most importantly, driving safety.

Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it as needed: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. Other- wise, driving instability or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can result from incorrect tire inflation pressures.<

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 86, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 87.<

Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes and tire brands respectively

approved and recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow- ing:

> Tire sizes for your vehicle

> Load conditions

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.

These pressure specifications can be found on the door post when you open the driver's door.

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph/

160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please

note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column of the table on the following pages and adjust your tire inflation pressures as needed. Other- wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the law could occur.

M o

b il

it y

197

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Tire inflation pressures for 650i Coupe

Tire inflation pressures for 650i Convertible

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceed- ing 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S 245/50 R 17 99 H M+S

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 W

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 W

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W Rear: 275/30 R 20 93 Y

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 227.

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceed- ing 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S 245/50 R 17 99 H M+S

32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 W

32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 W

32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W Rear: 275/30 R 20 93 Y

32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 227.

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

198

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed letter T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire age The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on the sidewall: DOT 1009 means that the tire was manufac- tured in week 10 of 2009.

BMW recommends replacing all tires at least every 6 years, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1, times as well on the govern- ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia- tions in driving habits, service practices and dif- ferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur- faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.<

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

For instance

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating (not on ZR tires) Speed code letter (in front of the R on ZR tires)

245/45 R 18 96 W

For instance

Manufacturer code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 1009

M o

b il

it y

199

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC run-flat tires You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 200.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.

Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm. For the sake of safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum- ference and are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread has been driven down to the wear indicators, a tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.

Wheel/tire damage Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep- tible to road hazards and consequential dam- ages. Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These kinds of problems may also be signaled by other changes in vehicle response, such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

In these cases, reduce speed immedi- ately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and other road users.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

200

Run-flat tires

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire. Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforce- ment ensures that the tire retains some residual safety in the event of pressure drop and driving remains possible to a restricted degree.

To continue driving with a damaged tire:

> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 86

> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Notifi- cation of low tire inflation pressure, page 88

New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that

works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a dan- ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal- anced.<

Retreaded tires BMW does not recommend that you use retreaded tires, as driving safety may be

impaired. The causes for this include the possi- bly different tire casing structures and the often wide variations in their age, which can result in a limited service life.<

The right wheels and tires BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions than the approved units these differences could lead to body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot be held liable for driving safety.<

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com- bination at your BMW center.

The right wheel-and-tire combination is another vital factor in ensuring reliable opera- tion of various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single tread config- uration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or converting from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire, refer to page 87. Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on this subject.

M o

b il

it y

201

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Recommended tire brands

Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW depending on the tire size. You can recognize these from the clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.

When used properly, these tires comply with the most demanding standards for safety and vehicle response.

Run-flat tires When mounting new tires, or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat tires for your own safety. In addition, no spare tire is available in case of a flat tire. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Watch speed Always observe the maximum permissi- ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise

tire damage may occur, which can result in acci- dents.<

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Rotating wheels between axles BMW does not recommend moving the front wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise the handling characteristics may be impaired. With tires of different makes and types* such a change is not permissible.

Snow chains* BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains, classifies them as road-safe and recommends them. Consult your BMW center for more infor- mation.

These snow chains are approved exclusively for use in pairs on the rear wheels with the tire size:

> 245/50 R 17

> 245/45 R 18

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after installing snow chains as this could cause

the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction. When driving with snow chains, it may be prac- tical to briefly activate DTC, refer to page 84.<

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

202

Under the hood

Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without

the required professional technical training. If you do not know what repair procedures to follow, have work on your vehicle done only by your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz- ards.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull lever.

Opening

Press the release handle and open the hood. Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may

result. If you see any signs that the hood is not com- pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you should stop at once and close it securely.<

M o

b il

it y

203

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Engine compartment

1 Filler spout for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil

2 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 217

3 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp and windshield cleaning systems, refer to page 63

4 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 205.

Engine oil The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil level check.

The condition for the most accurate indication of the oil level possible is measurement with the engine at operating temperature, i.e. following an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km. You can display the oil level on the Control Dis- play while driving or when stopped on a level surface with the engine running.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages > "Engine oil level OK"

> "Measurement not possible at this time."

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

204

> "Measuring engine oil level...": This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is moving. If the engine oil has been topped off, the measurement of the oil level can take up to 30 minutes.

> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!": Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil at the next opportunity, refer also to Adding engine oil below. If the oil level displayed is below minimum, add engine oil immediately. Failure to do so may lead to engine damage.

> "Engine oil level too high! Have this checked.":

Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without

delay.<

> "Measurement inactive. Have this checked.": Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to Service requirements on page 75. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add 1 US quart/liter of oil until a corre- sponding message is shown on the Control Dis- play.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-

aged.<

Continuous exposure to used oil has caused cancer in laboratory testing.

For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas of skin with soap and water after such work. Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and observe the warnings on the containers to pre- vent health risks.<

Oil change Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Approved engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves spe- cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.

Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is unavailable, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only use oils of the specification API SM or higher.

Your BMW center will be happy to answer detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-

mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.<

You can also call BMW of North America at 1- 800-831-1117 or visit the website at www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Do not use oil additives; under some cir- cumstances, they can damage your

engine.<

Viscosity grades Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is specified in SAE grades.

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on the climatic conditions in the region in which you normally drive your BMW.

Approved oils belong to the 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 and 5W-30 SAE grades.<

M o

b il

it y

205

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

These oils can be used at all temperatures.

Coolant Do not open the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause

burns.<

Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a coolant additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. The additives

present a health hazard.<

Always observe all applicable environ- mental laws and regulations when dis-

posing of used coolant additives.<

Checking coolant level

1. Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter- clockwise to allow any accumulated pres- sure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. The coolant level is correct when the cool- ant level is between the MIN and MAX marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until it clicks.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.

M ai

n te

n an

ce

206

Maintenance

BMW maintenance system

The BMW maintenance system supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The service schedule also includes operations related to the vehicle's comfort and convenience features, such as replacement of the filters for the inside air. The ultimate objective is to ensure economical maintenance by providing the ideal service for your vehicle.

Should the day come when you decide to sell your BMW, a complete center service history will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.

CBS Condition Based Service Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

You can set the Control Display to show remaining distances and times of selected maintenance intervals and legally mandated deadlines, refer to page 75:

> Engine oil

> Brake pads, front and rear separately

> Brake fluid

> Vehicle check

> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in remote control Your vehicle stores the information required maintenance continuously in the remote con- trol during driving. After accessing the data stored in the remote control, your BMW Service Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of service procedures for your own individual vehi- cle. You should therefore hand over the remote control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser- vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for service.

Make sure the date is set correctly, refer to page 77, otherwise the effectiveness

of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your

BMW center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<

M o

b il

it y

207

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnostics interface

Components which are decisive for the exhaust-gas composition can be checked via the OBD socket with a device.

This socket is located under a cover on the left side of the driver's footwell, directly under the instrument panel.

Exhaust-gas values The warning lamp lights up: The vehicle emissions are raised. The trip can be continued. Have the vehicle

checked as soon as possible.

Display of the previously described malfunction in Canadian models.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In this case you should reduce speed and drive to the nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage to the emission-relevant components, espe- cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight- ened, the OBD system will assume that

fuel vapor escapes. Then a display lights up. If the cap is then tightened, the display will go out within a few days.<

Data recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev- eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a device for recording or transmitting certain vehicle data or information. If you have also sub- scribed to BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can

be transmitted or recorded to enable corre- sponding services.

C ar

e

208

Care

Car-care products Regular cleaning and care make a significant contribution to retaining your BMW's value.

For the cleaning and care of your vehicle, BMW recommends using only products that BMW has approved for this purpose.

Your BMW center will be glad to advise you about products and services for the cleaning and care of your BMW.

Original BMW Care Products are materi- als tested, laboratory tested, and tested in

actual use. They offer optimum care and pro- tection for your vehicle.<

Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents; they can damage your vehi-

cle.<

Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or pose health risks.

You should therefore heed the warnings and hazard indications on the packaging. Open the doors or windows on your vehicle whenever cleaning the interior. Make sure there is suffi- cient ventilation in enclosed spaces. Use only products that are formulated for vehicle clean- ing.<

Exterior care

Washing your vehicle In the winter months, it is especially important to ensure that the vehicle is

washed on a regular basis. Otherwise, signifi- cant soiling and road salt can cause damage to the vehicle.<

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. Failure to do so

may lead to a reduction in braking efficiency and also to corrosion of the brake rotors.<

Car washes Give preference to cloth car washes.

Do not use high-pressure car washes because they can cause drops of water to

penetrate in the vicinity of the windshield.<

Before driving into the car wash, make sure that it is suitable for your BMW. Pay attention to the following points:

> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to page 225.

> If necessary, fold in the outside rearview mirrors, refer to page 51.

> Maximum permissible tire width.

> The convertible top must not be treated with wax. Make sure that a program without wax or a special convertible program is available.

Avoid car washes with guide rail heights over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is a dan-

ger of damaging chassis parts.<

Preparations for driving into the car wash:

> Deactivate rain sensor to prevent unwanted wiper activation.

> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoil- ers or phone antennas, if they could be damaged.

Automatic transmission Before driving into the car wash, make sure the vehicle is able to roll by making sure to:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Shift into transmission position N.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Switch off the engine.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Steam jets/high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, ensure that you maintain suffi-

cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed a temperature of 140 F/606.

M o

b il

it y

209

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Insufficient distance or excessive pressure or temperature can damage parts of the vehicle or can result in water penetration. Follow the oper- ating instructions for the high-pressure clean- ing jets.<

When using high-pressure cleaning jets, do not remain in one place for a long time

and be sure to maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm from sensors, e.g. Park Distance Control sensors or radar sensors.<

Hand washing When washing the vehicle by hand, use plenty of water and car washing shampoo. Clean the vehicle with gentle pressure using a sponge or a washing brush.

Before cleaning the windshield, deacti- vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-

tion to prevent unwanted wiper operation.<

Follow local guidelines for washing vehi- cles by hand.<

Headlamps Do not rub dry and never use abrasives or strong solvents to clean the covers.

Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or insect remover and wash away with plenty of water.

Use a window deicer to remove accumulated ice and snow, not a scraper.

Windows Use a glass cleaner to clean the inside and out- side surfaces of the windows and the glass sur- faces of the mirrors.

Do not use quartz-containing cleansers to clean glass surfaces of the mirrors.<

Convertible top care The appearance and service life of the convert- ible top depend on proper care and operation.

Please follow these instructions:

> Never stow the convertible top in the con- vertible top compartment when it is wet or

frozen, since this can cause water marks, mildew stains, and scuff marks.

> If water marks do occur on the headliner, remove them with a microfiber cloth and interior cleanser.

> When parking for long intervals in enclosed spaces, make sure there is sufficient venti- lation.

> Remove bird droppings immediately because their caustic properties have a cor- rosive effect on the convertible top and can damage the rubber seals.

Do not use stain remover, paint thinner, solvents, gasoline, or the like to remove

stains. These substances can damage the rub- ber coating. Improper care and cleaning can cause leaks to develop in the convertible top and its seams.<

In the event of more serious soiling, use a spe- cial convertible top cleaner. When doing so, follow the manufacturer's directions for use.

After three to five washings, treat the convert- ible top with sealant.

Caring for the vehicle finish Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value and protects the paint from the long-term effects of aggressive substances.

Regionally occurring environmental factors can affect and damage vehicle finish. It is therefore important to tailor the frequency and extent of your car care accordingly.

Immediately remove particularly aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree resin, or bird droppings; other- wise, they may damage your paint.

Repairing paint damage Repair stone damage or scratches imme- diately, depending on the severity of the

damage, to prevent the formation of rust.<

BMW recommends having paint damage pro- fessionally repaired using Genuine BMW finish materials in accordance with factory guidelines.

C ar

e

210

Waxing Sealant is required when water no longer beads on the clean surface of the paint. Use only prod- ucts that contain carnauba wax or synthetic wax to seal your finish.

Rubber gaskets Treat only with water or a rubber care product.

To avoid noise or damage, do not use products that contain silicone to care for

rubber gaskets.<

Chrome components Particularly after exposure to road salt, thor- oughly cleanse parts like the radiator grille, door handles, or window frames with plenty of water with shampoo added to it. For additional treat- ment, use chrome polish.

Alloy wheels Depending on your system, braking can gener- ate dust, which settles on the light-alloy wheels. Remove this dust regularly with acid-free wheel cleaner.

Do not use aggressive, acid-containing, strongly alkaline, or coarse cleansers and

do not use steam cleaners at temperatures greater than 140 F/606, otherwise you may damage your vehicle.<

Outside sensors Sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such as Park Distance Control sensors or radar sensors, should be kept clean and free of ice to retain their full function.

Interior care

Upholstery/fabrics Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner in order to remove surface dirt.

In the event of more serious soiling such as bev- erage stains, use a soft sponge or a lint-free microfiber cloth in combination with suitable

interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the packaging.

Clean upholstery material over a large area extending out to the seams. Avoid

intense friction.<

Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of clothing can cause damage to

the seat covering. Make sure that the Velcro fasteners are closed.<

Leather/leather coverings The leather used by BMW is a high quality natural product. Slight patterns in the

grain are part of the typical properties of a natu- ral leather.<

Dust and dirt from the road chafe in pores and folds and result in considerable wear and cause the leather surface to become prematurely brit- tle. We therefore suggest that you clean the leather with a dust cloth or vacuum cleaner at regular intervals.

Particularly with light-colored leather, make sure to clean it regularly since it has a greater tendency to become soiled.

Treat the leather twice a year with a leather lotion since dirt and grease harm the protective layer of the leather.

Carpets/cargo bay Carpeting, floor mats, and luggage compart- ment rugs and paneling can be cleaned with a vacuum or in the event of more serious soiling, cleansed with an interior cleaner.

Floor mats and luggage compartment rugs can be removed for cleaning. When inserting into place, make sure that the seat rails do not pro- trude over the floor mats; otherwise floor mats can be damaged.

Fluff on new floor mats is a result of the produc- tion process and can be removed by repeated vacuuming.

Plastic components inside Clean the glass cover of the instrument panel, imitation leather surfaces, lamp lenses, and

M o

b il

it y

211

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

matte components with water and, if necessary, a solvent-free plastic cleaner.

Fine wooden components Use a damp cloth to clean fine wooden trim panels and components. Follow up by drying with a soft cloth.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically, as this may

destroy the webbing.<

Inside sensors Clean inside sensors such as those of the High- beam Assistant using a lint-free cloth moist- ened with glass cleaner.

Displays Clean displays like the radio or the Control Dis- play using a display-cleaning cloth or a soft, nonabrasive lint-free cloth.

Avoid using excessive pressure when cleaning displays; otherwise, you could

damage them.<

Never use chemical-based cleansers or household scouring products. Keep all

liquids away from the equipment. Otherwise corrosion or damage to surfaces or electrical components can occur.<

CD/DVD drives Do not use cleaning CDs; they can dam- age parts of the player.<

Storing your vehicle When storing your vehicle for longer than three months, please seek the advice of your BMW center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines.

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

212

Replacing components

Onboard vehicle tool kit

Coupe

Convertible

The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage compartment under the floor mat.

Replacing wiper blades

1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly.

2. Press the safety tabs together while sliding the wiper blade toward the front to disen- gage it.

3. Mount the new wiper blade and slide in until it is heard to engage.

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the specified procedures, have the corresponding work carried out at your BMW center.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its metal socket.<

A selection of replacement bulbs is available at your BMW center.

Whenever you perform any work on the electrical system, turn off the systems/

consumers involved to prevent short circuits from occurring. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<

For information on how to care for the head- lamps, please follow the instructions on page 208.

For bulbs for which changing is not described, and for checking and adjusting

headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen- ter.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light- emitting diodes.

M o

b il

it y

213

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several

hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

Xenon lamps The service life of these bulbs is very long and the probability of a failure is very low, provided that they are not switched on and off an unusual number of times. If one of these bulbs should nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv- ing with great caution using the fog lamps, pro- vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit this.

Have work on the xenon lighting system performed only by your BMW center or a

workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when work is carried out improperly.<

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lamps

The illustration shows the left-hand side of the engine compartment.

35-watt bulb, H 8

1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab and removing the cover cap upward.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Always wear gloves and eye protection the atmosphere inside the H8 bulb is

pressurized. Otherwise there is a danger of inju- ries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during replacement.<

Side-mounted turn signals 5-watt bulb, WY5W

1. Press against the front edge of the lamp with the tip of your finger, then push it to the rear, release the snap connection at the front and take it off the trim strip.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Tail lamps The roadside parking lamps, tail lamps, brake lamps, and turn signals use LED

technology. The backup lamps are equipped with long-life bulbs. Please contact a BMW cen- ter in case of a malfunction.<

1 Turn signal

2 Roadside parking, tail and brake lamps

3 Reflector

4 Backup lamp

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

214

License plate lamps

5-watt bulb, W5W

1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as a standard feature. An immediate wheel change in the event of a flat tire is therefore no longer required.

To continue driving with a damaged tire:

> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 86

> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Notifi- cation of low tire inflation pressure, page 88

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires on page 200.

If you have new tires mounted or switch from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, use run- flat tires because no spare tire is provided in case of a flat. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 200.

The suitable tools for changing tires are available as accessories from your BMW

center.<

Car jacking points

The jacking points for the car jack are located in the positions shown.

Vehicle battery

Battery care The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Charging battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine switched off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 217.

Disposal Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or bring them to a recycling

center. Maintain the battery in an upright posi- tion for transport and storage. Always restrain the battery to prevent it from tipping over during transport.<

Power failure Following a temporary power failure, e.g. due to a discharged battery, the use of some equip- ment will be restricted, requiring its reinitializa- tion. In the same way, individual settings are lost and must be updated again:

M o

b il

it y

215

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

> Seat, mirror and steering wheel* memory The positions must be stored again, refer to page 47.

> Time and date Must be updated again, refer to page 76.

> Radio Radio stations need to be stored again, refer to page 150.

> Navigation system You must wait until the system becomes functional again, refer to page 126.

> Glass roof, electric It may not be possible to move the glass roof. The system must be initialized, refer to page 38.

> Active steering The system automatically initializes itself briefly during a trip. The system is deacti- vated during this time, refer to page 89.

> Power windows The pinch prevention system for the power windows must be reinitialized, refer to page 36.

Talk to your BMW center before placing the stored vehicle back in service. <

Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating, as this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are located in the compartment for the onboard tool kit, refer to page 212.

Information on fuse allocation is located below the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.

In glove compartment 1. Press the button on the back in the center of

partition 1 and pull out the partition upward, arrow 2.

2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and fold the lid 4 forward.

In cargo bay

Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit. Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional fuses 2 are provided there.

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

216

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency request

Requirements > BMW Assist is activated.

Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 188.

> Radio readiness is activated.

> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network.

> The BMW Assist system is functional.

> Full preparation package mobile phone. With this equipment, an Emergency Request is still possible when no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.

Once your BMW Assist subscription expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop. If the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, Emergency Requests are not pos- sible. The BMW Assist system can be reacti- vated by a BMW center after signing a new con- tract.

Initiating an Emergency Request 1. Briefly press protective cover to open.

With some vehicle equipment packages or in the Convertible, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.

When the Emergency Request is received at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and arranges for additional steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances.

If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.

In the event of a BMW Assist emergency call, data that are used to determine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of your vehicle if it can be established, are trans- mitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. The BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you, though.

Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the but- ton.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under

unfavorable conditions.<

M o

b il

it y

217

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located on the left-hand side in the luggage compartment.

First aid kit* The first aid kit is located in the filler element of the rear seat backrest.

1. Press the button downward and pull the filler element forward.

2. Take out first aid kit.

To refit the filler element, insert the two bottom tabs into the strip and press the

filler element back into place. Make sure that you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<

Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit have a limited service life. Therefore, check the

expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace the contents concerned in good time if necessary.

Roadside Assistance* Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group offers you assistance in the event of a breakdown around the clock, including on weekends and public holidays.

The phone numbers of Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.

With BMW Assist you can contact Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive, refer to page 187.

Jump starting When your battery is discharged, you can use two jumper cables to start your BMW with power from the battery in a second vehicle. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical

components while the engine is running. Care- fully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat- tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi- cle.

3. Switch off any electrical systems and com- ponents in both vehicles.

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

218

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise

there is a danger of shorting.<

Connecting jumper cables To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol- low this sequence when connecting

jumper cables.<

In your BMW, the so-called jump-starting termi- nal for jump starting in the engine compartment serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also refer to engine compartment overview on page 203. The cover cap is marked with a +.

1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump- starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+ to the positive terminal of the battery or a jump-starting terminal of the vehicle provid- ing assistance.

3. Attach the second end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a start- ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/ to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle. Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative terminal.

5. Attach the second end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting engine 1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle

and allow it to run at idle for several minutes at slightly increased speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the connection sequence.

Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing.<

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using tow fitting The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit mounted on the inside of the luggage compart- ment under the floor mat, refer to page 212, and should always remain in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

Only use the tow fitting that comes with the vehicle and screw it in as far as possi-

ble. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<

M o

b il

it y

219

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Access to screw thread Press the arrow symbol on the cover in the bumper.

Front

Rear

Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 56, otherwise the low

beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield wipers would not be available. Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised, as otherwise the steering can turn to the left or right.When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. This then requires increased effort for braking and steering. Active steering is deactivated and larger steering wheel movements are required.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend- ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys- tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Sport automatic transmission Before towing, manually release the transmission lock, even if there is no mal-

function in the transmission. Otherwise there is a risk that the transmission lock will engage dur- ing towing.<

Manually unlocking and locking transmission lock, refer to page 60.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the sport auto- matic transmission may be damaged.<

Towing methods Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage

may result.<

In some countries, towing with tow bars or ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar- ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the respective country.

With tow bar The towing vehicle may not be lighter than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it

will not be possible to reliably control vehicle response.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will exert lateral forces, tending to push the vehicle sideways.

Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings, as attachment to other vehicle parts can

lead to damage.<

With tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

220

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to damage.<

With tow truck

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Tow-starting Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but instead start the engine by means of jump start- ing, refer to page 217. Vehicles equipped with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold. When equipped with a sport automatic transmission, the engine can- not be started by tow-starting.

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, comply with country-specific regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 56.

3. Shift into 3rd gear.

4. Tow-start with the clutch completely depressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch again completely.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

M o

b il

it y

221

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Reference This chapter contains the technical data,

the short commands of the voice activation system, and the index that will direct you as

quickly as possible to the information you are looking for.

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

224

Technical data

Engine data

650i

Displacement cu in/cm 292.8/4,799

No. of cylinders 8

Maximum output hp 360

at engine speed rpm 6,300

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 360/488

at engine speed rpm 3,400

R e

fe re

n ce

225

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Dimensions

Coupe

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

226

Convertible

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

R e

fe re

n ce

227

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Weights

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities

650i Coupe 650i Convertible

Curb weight lbs./kg 3,814/1,730 4,277/1,940

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 4,652/2,110 5,049/2,290

Load lbs./kg 838/380 772/350

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,337/1,060 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,491/1,130 2,778/1,260

Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 15.9/450 10.6/300

> with raised convertible top compart- ment floor, refer to page 32

cu ft/l 12.4/350

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel grade: page 195

including reserve of: US gal/liters approx. 2.6/10

Window and headlamp washer system

US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5 For more details: page 63

S ho

rt c

o m

m an

d s

o f v

o ic

e ac

ti va

ti o

n sy

st em

228

Short commands of voice activation system

With short commands you can run certain func- tions directly, regardless of which menu item is

selected. Here are the important short com- mands for the voice activation system.

Useful short commands

CD/Multimedia

CD/DVD drive

*

Function Command

Opening the music collection {Music collection}

Tone control {Tone}

Selecting the settings {Settings}

Opening the computer {Onboard info}

Opening the contacts* {Contacts}

Displaying the phone book* {Phonebook}

Opening BMW Assist* {B M W Assist}

Opening the home address* {Home address}

Opening destination entry* {Enter address}

Opening destination guidance* {Guidance}

Function Command

Selecting a CD {Select C D}

Selecting a CD and track {C D ... track ...} e.g. CD 3 track 5

Selecting a track {C D track } e.g. track 5

Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}

CD and DVD {C D and D V D}

CD and DVD menu {C D and D V D}

Selecting a DVD {D V D }

Entertainment details on the split screen {Entertainment details}

R e

fe re

n ce

229

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Music collection

External devices

TV

Tone control

Radio

FM

AM

DAB

Function Command

Calling up the current playback {Current playback}

Opening the music collection {Music collection}

Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}

Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}

Function Command

Opening external devices {External devices}

Function Command

Calling up the TV {T V}

Function Command

Opening the tone control {Tone}

Function Command

Calling up the radio {Radio}

Calling up FM {F M}

Opening manual search {Manual search}

Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}

To select radio station {Station } e.g. W-PLJ

Calling up a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ

Function Command

Calling up AM {A M}

Opening manual search {Manual search}

Function Command

To select radio station {Station } e.g. W-PLJ

S ho

rt c

o m

m an

d s

o f v

o ic

e ac

ti va

ti o

n sy

st em

230

Weather Band

Satellite radio

Presets

Telephone

Navigation

General information

Function Command

Selecting the Weather Band {Weather band}

Switching on the Weather Band {Weather band on}

Selecting a Weather Band station {Select a weather channel}

Function Command

Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}

Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}

Selecting a satellite radio channel {Satellite radio channel} e.g. channel 2

Function Command

Calling up the stored stations {Presets}

Choosing a stored station {Select preset}

Selecting a stored station {Preset } e.g. stored station 2

Function Command

Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}

To display phone book {Phonebook}

Redialing {Redial}

Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}

Dialing a phone number {Dial number}

Displaying the list of messages {Messages}

Displaying Bluetooth {Bluetooth}

Function Command

Navigation menu {Navigation}

Opening destination entry {Enter address}

Opening destination guidance {Guidance}

To start destination guidance {Start guidance}

R e

fe re

n ce

231

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Map

Split screen settings

To end destination guidance {Stop guidance}

Opening the home address {Home address}

Opening the route criteria {Route preference}

Opening the route {Route information}

To switch on voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}

Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}

To switch off voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}

To display address book {Address book}

Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}

Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}

Special destinations {Points of interest}

Function Command

Function Command

Displaying the map {Map}

Map facing north {Map facing north}

Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}

Perspective map {Perspective map}

Automatic scaling of the map* {Map with automatic scaling}

To change scale {Map scale}

Scale ... feet* {Map scale ... feet} e.g. map scale 100 feet

Scale ... meters* {Map scale ... meters} e.g. map scale 100 meters

Scale ... kilometers* {Map scale ... kilometers} e.g. map scale 5 kilometers

Scale ... miles* {Map scale ... miles} e.g. map scale 5 miles

Scale ... yards* {Map scale ... yards} e.g. map scale 100 yards

Function Command

Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}

Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}

Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}

Split screen current position {Split screen current position}

Split screen map facing north {Split screen map facing north}

Split screen direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}

Split screen perspective {Split screen perspective}

S ho

rt c

o m

m an

d s

o f v

o ic

e ac

ti va

ti o

n sy

st em

232

Contacts

BMW Assist

Vehicle information

Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}

Split screen scale ... feet* {Split screen scale ... feet} e.g. split screen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale ... meters* {Split screen scale ... meters} e.g. split screen scale 100 meters

Split screen scale ... kilometers* {Split screen scale ... kilometers} e.g. split screen scale 5 kilometers

Split screen scale ... miles* {Split screen scale ... miles} e.g. split screen scale 5 miles

Split screen scale ... yards* {Split screen scale ... yards} e.g. split screen scale 100 yards

Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}

Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}

Function Command

Function Command

Opening the contacts {Contacts}

My contacts {My contacts}

New contact {New contact}

Function Command

Opening BMW Assist {B M W Assist}

Opening BMW Search* {B M W Search}

Opening the Internet* {Internet}

Function Command

Opening the computer {Onboard info}

Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}

Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}

Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}

R e

fe re

n ce

233

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Settings

Vehicle

Equipment

Function Command

Opening the main menu {Main menu}

Selecting the settings {Settings}

Opening the options {Options}

Central screen settings {Control display}

Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}

Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}

Opening the speed limit {Limit}

Opening the light menu {Lighting}

Selecting the door lock {Door locks}

Function Command

Selecting the air conditioning {Climate}

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

234

Everything from A to Z

Index

A ABS Antilock Brake

System 83 indicator lamp 84 ACC, refer to Active cruise

control 64 Accessories 6 Accident, refer to Emergency

request 216 Activated-charcoal filter for

automatic climate control 107

Activation times of parked car ventilation, preselecting 107

Active cruise control 64 indicator lamp 68 radar sensor 68 selecting distance 66 warning lamps 68 Active front head restraints 48 Active steering 89 warning lamp 89 Adapter for spare key 26 Adaptive brake assistant 83 Adaptive brake lamps, refer to

Brake force display 90 Adaptive Light Control 99 Additional connection of

music player in mobile phone 166

Additives coolant 205 engine oil, refer to Approved

engine oils 204 Address, entering 127, 133 Address for navigation entering 127 Adjusting interior

temperature 104 Adjusting the tone during

audio operation, refer to Tone control 146

Adjusting thigh support 46 Airbags 90 deactivating, refer to

Exception for front passenger seat 53

indicator/warning lamp 92 indicator lamp for front

passenger airbags 91 sitting safely 45 Air distribution automatic 104 manual 105 Airing, refer to Ventilation 106 Air outlets, refer to

Ventilation 106 Air recirculation, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air control 105

Air supply, automatic climate control 103

Air volume 105 AKI, refer to Fuel

specifications 195 Alarm system 33 avoiding unintentional

alarms 34 interior motion sensor 33 switching off alarm 33 switching off tilt alarm

sensor and interior motion sensor 34

tilt alarm sensor 33 Albums of music

collection 163 Alloy wheels 210 All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 201 Alterations, technical, refer to

For your own safety 5 Antenna for mobile phone 172 Antifreeze coolant 205 washer fluid 63

Antilock Brake System ABS 83

Anti-theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 33

Anti-theft system, refer to Central locking system 27

Approved axle loads, refer to Weights 227

Approved engine oils 204 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 227 Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 111 Around the center console 14 Around the steering wheel 10 Arrival time refer to Computer 74 Ashtray 113 Assistance systems, refer to

Driving stability control systems 83

AUC Automatic recirculated- air control 105

Audio 146 controls 146 switching on/off 146 tone control 146 volume 146 Audio device, external 111 Automatic air distribution 104 air volume 104 cruise control 63, 64 headlamp control 98 steering wheel

adjustment 47 Automatic car washes also refer to Comfort

Access 35

R e

fe re

n ce

235

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Automatic climate control 103 automatic air

distribution 104 convertible program 104 parked car ventilation/

heating 107 switching on and off 106 Automatic closing of doors,

refer to Automatic soft closing 31

Automatic curb monitor 51 Automatic lighting refer to Automatic headlamp

control 98 refer to Daytime running

lamps 99 refer to Interior lamps 102 refer to Pathway lighting 99 refer to Welcome lamps 98 Automatic lights refer to High-beam

Assistant 100 Automatic Service

Request 190 Automatic soft closing 31 AUTO program for automatic

climate control 104 AUX-IN connection 111 AUX-IN port 166 Available services 190 Average fuel consumption 73 setting units 74 Average speed 73 Avoiding highways for

navigation 136 Avoiding unintentional

alarms 34 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 227

B Backrest contour, refer to

Lumbar support 46 Backrests, refer to Seats 45 Backup lamps, replacing

bulbs, refer to Tail lamps 213

Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 217

Bass, refer to Tone control 146

Battery jump starting 217 refer to Vehicle battery 214 Battery replacement, remote

control for Comfort Access 36

BC button, refer to Computer 73

Being towed 219 Belts, refer to Safety belts 50 Beverage holder, refer to

Cupholders 112 Blower, refer to Air

volume 105 Bluetooth, activating/

deactivating 174 BMW Car Shampoo 211 BMW Assist,

activating 188, 190 BMW Assist 186 BMW homepage 4 BMW maintenance

system 206 BMW Night Vision 94 activating 95 cleaning camera 96 cleaning camera, refer to

Wiper system 62 deactivating 96 making settings 96 BMW Search 188 BMW website 4 Bottle holder, refer to

Cupholders 112 Bracket for telephone or

mobile phone refer to Snap-in adapter 182 Brake assistant 83 adaptive 83 Brake force display 90 Brake lamps replacing bulbs, refer to Tail

lamps 213 two-stage 90

Brake rotors breaking-in 118 refer to Braking safely 120 Brakes ABS Antilock Brake

System 83 brake force display 90 breaking-in 118 CBC Cornering Brake

Control 83 electronic brake-force

distribution 83 parking brake 58 refer to Braking safely 120 Brake system 118 brake pads 118 brake rotors 120 breaking-in 118 warning lamp 13, 84 Braking safely 120 Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 217 Breaking-in brake pads 118 Breaking-in the clutch 118 Breaking-in the differential,

refer to Engine and differential 118

Break-in period 118 Brightness of Control

Display 81 Button for starting engine,

refer to Start/Stop button 56 Buttons on steering wheel 11

C California Proposition 65

Warning 6 Call accepting 175 ending 176 rejecting 176 Calling, refer to Phone

numbers, dialing 176 Can holder, refer to

Cupholders 112 Capacities 227 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 214

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

236

Care 208 car-care products 208 carpets 210 car washes 208 CD/DVD player 211 chrome components 210 convertible top 209 displays 211 exterior 208 fine wooden

components 211 hand washing 209 headlamps 209 high-pressure cleaning

jets 208 interior 210 leather 210 light-alloy wheels 210 paint 209 plastic components 210 rubber gaskets 210 safety belts 211 sensors and cameras 211 upholstery and cloth-

covered paneling 210 windows 209 Cargo bay capacity 227 emergency release 32 opening/closing, refer to

Luggage compartment lid 31

opening from inside 31 opening from outside 31 opening with remote

control 28 Caring for the vehicle

finish 209 Car key, refer to Keys/remote

control 26 Car phone installation location, refer to

Center armrest 111 refer to separate operating

instructions Car phone, refer to

Telephone 172 Car radio, refer to Radio 149 Car Shampoo 211

Car wash 57 with Comfort Access 35 Car washes 208 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 119 CBC Cornering Brake

Control 83 CBS Condition Based

Service 206 CD, audio playback 154 CD changer 154, 158 controls 146 fast forward/reverse 156 filling or emptying the

magazine 158 random sequence 155 selecting a track 154 switching on/off 146 tone control 146 volume 146 CD player 154 controls 146 fast forward/reverse 156 random sequence 155 selecting a track 154 switching on/off 146 tone control 146 volume 146 Center armrest, adjusting

height 111 Center console 14 Central locking from inside 30 from outside 28 Central locking system 27 Comfort Access 34 hotel function 30 Changes, technical, refer to

For your own safety 5 Changing language on

Control Display 80 Changing units of measure on

Control Display 74 Changing wheels 200, 214 CHECK button 78 Check Control 77 Check Gas Cap 194 Checking air pressure, refer to

Tire inflation pressure 196

Child restraint fixing system LATCH 54

Child restraint systems 53 Child seats, refer to

Transporting children safely 53

Chrome-plated parts 211 Chrome polish 211 Cigarette lighter 113 Cigarette lighter socket, refer

to Connecting electrical devices 113

Cleaning your BMW, refer to Care 208

Clock 72 12h/24h format 77 setting time 76 setting time and date 77 Closing from inside 30 from outside 28 Closing fuel filler cap 194 Clothes hooks, Coupe 112 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting

engine 57 Comfort Access 34 observe in car wash 35 replacing battery, remote

control 35 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 56

Compartments, refer to Storage compartments 112

Computer 73 displays on Control

Display 74 Concierge service 187 Condensation, refer to When

vehicle is parked 120 Condition Based Service

CBS 206 Confirmation signals for

locking and unlocking 29 Connecting car vacuum

cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical devices 113

R e

fe re

n ce

237

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Consumption display, refer to Average fuel consumption 73

Consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 73

Contacts creating 184 Control Center, refer to

iDrive 16 Control Display, refer to

iDrive 16 setting brightness 81 switching off/on 19 Controller, refer to iDrive 16 Controls, refer to Cockpit 10 Convenient closing windows, with Convenient

Access with Coupe 35 with Comfort Access 35 Convenient opening and

closing convertible top 28, 30 glass sunroof 28, 30 windows 28, 30 Convertible convertible program for

automatic climate control 104

opening and closing windows 36

rollover protection system 92

top 39 wind deflector 43 Convertible top closing manually 41 convenient opening and

closing 30 emergency closing 41 opening and closing 40 Convertible top care 209 Coolant 205 checking level 205 temperature 72 Cooling, maximum 105 Cooling fluid, refer to

Coolant 205

Cooling function, automatic climate control 105

Cooling system, refer to Coolant 205

Copyright 2 Cornering Brake Control

CBC 83 Country codes DVD 156 Country of destination for

navigation 127 Courtesy lamps, refer to

Interior lamps 102 Cradle for telephone or mobile

phone 111 Cruise control 63 active cruise control 64 Cruising range 73 Cup holders 112 Cupholders 15 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 227 Current playback external devices 168 of music collection 163 Customer Relations 189 Cylinders, refer to Engine

data 224

D Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10 Data, technical 224 dimensions 225 engine 224 weights 227 Data transfer 190 Date 72 date format 77 setting 77 Daytime running lamps 99 replacing bulbs 213

Defect door lock 30 glass sunroof 39 luggage compartment lid 32 tires, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 85 tires, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 87 Defrosting windows 105 Defrosting windows and

removing condensation 105 Defrosting windshield, refer to

Defrosting windows 105 Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 105 Destination address entering 127, 133 Destination entry via BMW

Assist 131 Destination for navigation entering via map 132 entering via voice 133 entry 127 Destination guidance 136 bypassing route

sections 137 changing specified

route 136 continuing 136 starting 136 voice instructions 137 volume of voice

instructions 138 Detour, selecting 141 Digital clock 72 Digital radio, refer to HD

Radio 150 Dimensions Convertible 226 Coupe 225 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 61 Direction announcements,

refer to Voice instructions 137

Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 137

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 129

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

238

Displacement, refer to Engine data 224

Display, refer to iDrive controls 16

Display elements, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 102

Displays on Control Display, refer to

iDrive 16 refer to Instrument

cluster 12 Displays on the windshield,

refer to Head-up Display 93 Disposal battery of remote control

with Comfort Access 36 coolant 205 vehicle battery 214 Distance, refer to

Computer 74 Distance control, refer to

Active cruise control 64 Distance to destination, refer

to Computer 74 Distance warning, refer to

PDC Park Distance Control 82

Door entry lighting, refer to Interior lamps 102

Door key, refer to Keys/ remote control 26

Door lock 29 Doors manual operation 30 remote control 28 DOT Quality Grades 198 Draft-free ventilation 106 Drinks holder, refer to

Cupholders 112 Drive-off assistant 85 Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 98 Driving stability control

systems 83 Driving through water 120 Driving tips, refer to General

driving notes 118

Dry air, refer to Cooling function 105

Drying the air, refer to Cooling function 105

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 83

indicator lamp 13, 84 malfunction 84 DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 84 activating 84 indicator lamp 13, 84 DVD country codes 156 settings 157 video playback 156 DVD menu 157 DVD player, refer to CD

player 154 DVD video 156 Dynamic Brake Control DBC warning lamp 85 Dynamic destination

guidance 137 Dynamic Drive 85 Dynamic Driving Control 60 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 83 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 84

E Easy entry, refer to Entering

rear 49 Easy entry/exit 52 Eject button, refer to Buttons

in area of the CD/DVD player 146

Electrical malfunction convertible top 41 door lock 30 driver's door 30 fuel filler flap 194 glass sunroof 39 luggage compartment lid 32 storage compartment, hotel

function 31 Electric convertible top 39

Electric steering wheel adjustment 52

Electronic brake-force distribution 83

Electronic oil level check 203 Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation convertible top 41 door lock 30 driver's door 30 fuel filler flap 194 glass sunroof 39 hotel function 31 luggage compartment lid 32 transmission lock, sport

automatic transmission 60 Emergency release for

luggage compartment lid in cargo bay 32

Emergency request 216 Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 217 Engine breaking-in 118 data 224 overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 72 speed 224 starting 57 starting, Comfort Access 34 switching off 57 switching off when equipped

with Automatic transmission, with Comfort Access 35

Engine compartment 203 Engine coolant 205

R e

fe re

n ce

239

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Engine oil adding 204 additives, refer to Approved

engine oils 204 approved oils 204 electronic oil level check 203 interval between changes,

refer to Service requirements 75

oil change 204 oil grades, refer to Approved

engine oils 204 recommended oils 204 temperature 73 temperature gauge 73 Engine output, refer to Engine

data 224 Engine overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 72 Engine speed, refer to Engine

data 224 Engine starting, refer to

Starting engine 57 Entering destination via town/

city name 127 Entering rear 49 Entering zip code for

navigation 128 Entertainment sound output

on/off 146 Entry map for destination 132 Equalizer, refer to Tone

control 147 ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 83

Event Data Recorders 207 Exhaust system, refer to Hot

exhaust system 119 Exterior mirrors 51 adjusting 51 automatic dimming

feature 52 automatic heating 51 folding in and out 51 tilting down passenger-side

exterior mirror 51 External audio device 111

External devices random sequence 168 Eye for tow-starting and

towing, refer to Tow fitting 218

F Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 77 False alarm refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 34 refer to Switching off

alarm 33 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 50 Fastest route for

navigation 136 Fast forward CD changer 156 CD player 156 Filler neck for washer fluid 63 Filter, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 107 First aid, refer to First aid

kit 217 First aid kit 217 Flashing during locking/unlocking,

refer to Setting confirmation signals 29

triple turn signal activation 62

Flat tire Flat Tire Monitor 85 run-flat tires 86, 88, 200 Tire Pressure Monitor 87 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 87 warning lamp 86, 88 Flat tire, refer to Run-flat

tires 200 Flat Tire Monitor 85 false alarms 85 initializing system 86 snow chains 201 system limits 85 warning lamp 86

Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler neck for washer fluid 63

FM, waveband 149 Fog lamps 102 indicator lamp 13, 102 Folding into raised position

convertible top compartment floor, Convertible 32

Footbrake, refer to Braking safely 120

Footwell lamps, refer to Interior lamps 102

For your own safety 5 Free memory capacity, music

collection 164 Front airbags 90 Front passenger airbags deactivating 91 FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 85 Fuel average consumption 73 display 73 fuel specifications 195 high-quality brands 195 quality 195 specifications 195 tank contents, refer to

Capacities 227 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 73 Fuel display, refer to Fuel

gauge 73 Fuel-efficient driving refer to Saving fuel 118 Fuel filler door releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 194 Fuel filler flap 194 Fuses 215

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 109

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

240

Gasoline refer to Average fuel

consumption 73 refer to Fuel

specifications 195 refer to Required fuel 195 Gasoline display, refer to Fuel

gauge 73 Gas station

recommendations 137 Gearshift lever manual transmission 58 General driving

notes 118, 119 Glass sunroof, electric with

raise function 38 convenient opening and

closing 30 convenient opening and

closing with Comfort Access 35

moving manually 39 remote control 28 Glove compartment 110 GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 126 Grills, refer to Ventilation 106 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 227

H Handbrake indicator lamp 13, 58 Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 58 Hands-free system, refer to

Microphone 14 Hand washing 209 Hazard warning flashers 15 HD Radio 150 Head airbags 90 Headlamp cleaning tank, refer to

Capacities 227 Headlamp control,

automatic 98 Headlamp flasher 61

Headlamps cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 62 filler neck for washer

fluid 203 replacing bulbs 212 Head restraints active front head

restraints 48 front 48 sitting safely 45 Head-up Display 93 Heated mirrors 51 rear window 105 seats 50 steering wheel 52 Heating 104 exterior mirrors 51 interior 103 rear window 105 residual heat 106 seats 50 steering wheel 52 Heating with engine switched

off, refer to Residual heat 106

Heavy cargo, refer to Securing cargo 122

Height, refer to Dimensions 225

Height adjustment seats 46 steering wheel 52 High-beam Assistant 100 High beams 100 headlamp flasher 100 indicator lamp 13 High-pressure cleaning

jets 208, 209 High water, refer to Driving

through water 120 Highway, refer to Route

criteria 136 Hills 120 Holder for cups 112 Homepage of BMW 4 Hood 202 Horn 10

Hotel function 30 unlocking manually 31 Hot exhaust system 119 Hydraulic brake assistant,

refer to Brake assistant 83 Hydroplaning 119

I IBOC, refer to HD Radio 150 Ice, refer to Outside

temperature warning 72 Identification mark recommended tire

brands 201 run-flat tires 200 tire coding 198 iDrive 16 changing date and time 77 changing language 80 changing settings 80 changing units of measure

and display type 74 controller 16 controls 16 operating principle 17 setting brightness 81 start menu 17 status information 19 Ignition 56 switched off 57 switched on 56 Ignition key, refer to Keys/

remote control 26 Ignition key position 1, refer to

Radio readiness 56 Ignition key position 2, refer to

Ignition on 56 Ignition lock 56 starting engine with Comfort

Access 35 Impressum 2 Imprint 2

R e

fe re

n ce

241

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Indicator/warning lamps ABS Antilock Brake

System 84 active steering 89 airbags 92 brake system 84 DSC 13, 84 DTC 13, 84 Flat Tire Monitor 86 fog lamps 13, 102 parking brake 13, 58 safety belt warning 50 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 88 Indicator and warning lamps overview 13 Inflation pressure, refer to Tire

inflation pressure 196 Inflation pressure monitoring,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 85 Inflation pressure monitoring,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor 87

Initializing Flat Tire Monitor 86 radio, refer to Storing

stations 150 refer to Power failure 214 refer to Setting time and

date 77 seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory 47 Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice instructions 137

Instrument cluster 12 Instrument illumination, refer

to Instrument lighting 102 Instrument lighting 102 Instrument panel, refer to

Cockpit 10 Instrument panel, refer to

Instrument cluster 12 Integrated key 26 Integrated universal remote

control 109 Interactive map 132

Interior lamps 102 switching on with remote

control 28 Interior motion sensor 33 switching off 34 Interior rearview mirror,

automatic dimming feature 52

Intermittent mode of the wipers 62

Intersection, entering for navigation 128

iPod, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 166

iPod, connecting, refer to USB audio interface 166

J Jacking points 214 Joystick, refer to iDrive 16 Jumpering, refer to Jump

starting 217 Jump starting 217

K Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort

Access 34 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 34 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 26 Keys 26 key-related settings, refer to

Personal Profile 26 spare key 26 Kickdown, Sport automatic

transmission 59 Knee airbags 90 Knock control 195

L Lamps refer to High-beam

Assistant 100 refer to Parking lamps/low

beams 98

Lamps and bulbs 212 Lane demarcation lines, refer

to Lane Departure Warning 96

Lane Departure Warning 96 Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 122 Last destinations 130 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 54 Leather care 210 LEDs light-emitting

diodes 212 Length, refer to

Dimensions 225 License plate lamp, replacing

bulbs 214 Light Control, refer to

Adaptive Light Control 99 Light-emitting diodes

LEDs 212 Lighter 113 Lighting instruments 102 lamps and bulbs 212 of the vehicle, refer to

Lamps 98 Light switch 98 Loading securing cargo 122 stowing cargo 121 vehicle 120 Loading, refer to Cargo

loading 120 Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 122 Lock buttons in the doors,

refer to Locking 30 Locking 28 confirmation signals 29 from inside 30 from outside 28 without key, refer to Comfort

Access 34 without key, refer to Comfort

access 34

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

242

Locking and unlocking doors confirmation signals 29 from inside 30 from outside 28 Low beams 98 automatic 98 replacing bulbs 213 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 46 Luggage compartment hotel function 30 increasing capacity,

Convertible 32 Luggage compartment lid 31 emergency operation 32 emergency release 32 opening from inside 31 opening from outside 31 opening with remote

control 28, 31 unlocking manually 32 Luggage compartment lid/

tailgate Comfort Access 35 Lumbar support 46

M M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 201 Maintenance 206 refer to Service

requirements 75 Maintenance system 206 Malfunction convertible top 41 driver's door 30 fuel filler flap 194 hotel function 31 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 77 Managing music 164 Manual air distribution 105

Manual operation convertible top 41 door lock 30 driver's door 30 fuel filler flap 194 glass sunroof 39 hotel function 31 luggage compartment lid 32 transmission lock, sport

automatic transmission 60 Manual transmission 58 Map display 138 Map for navigation changing scale 139 destination entry 132 Map view facing north 138 Master key, refer to Keys/

remote control 26 Maximum cooling 105 Maximum speed with winter

tires 201 Measurements, refer to

Dimensions Convertible 226 Coupe 225 Memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 47

Menus, refer to iDrive 16 Messages 178 Messages from the concierge

service 179 Microfilter 107 Microphone for mobile phone 14 for voice activation

system 14 Mirror dimming feature 52 Mirrors 51 automatic curb monitor 51 folding in and out 51 heating 51 memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 47

Mobile phone adjusting volume 175 connecting, refer to Mobile

phone, pairing 172 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 111 operation via iDrive 175 pairing 172 refer to separate operating

instructions Mobile phone, refer to

Telephone 172 Mobile phone battery 183 Monitor, refer to iDrive 16 Monitoring pressure of tires,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 85 MP3 player, connecting, refer

to AUX-IN port 166 MP3 player, connecting, refer

to USB audio interface 166 Multi-channel playback 147 Multi-function steering wheel,

refer to Buttons on steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 61 refer to Wiper system 62 Music, playing 162 Music collection 161 backup 165 deleting 165 random sequence 164 restoring 165 Music player, connecting,

refer to AUX-IN port 166 Music player, connecting,

refer to USB audio interface 166

Music search 162 MW, waveband 149 My Info 179

R e

fe re

n ce

243

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

N Navigation starting destination

guidance after entering a destination 129

storing current position 129 voice activation 133 Navigation data 126 Navigation destination entering manually 127 home address 130 Navigation instructions, refer

to Switching voice instructions on/off 137

Navigation system 126 address book 129 bypassing route

sections 137 continuing destination

guidance 136 destination entry 127 dynamic destination

guidance 137 entering a destination

manually 127 entering destination via

voice 133 frequently asked

questions 142 gas station

recommendations 137 planning a trip 134 route list 137 selecting destination via

map 132 selecting route criteria 136 special destinations 130 starting destination

guidance 136 terminating destination

guidance 136 traffic bulletins 139 voice instructions 137 volume adjustment 138 Neck support, refer to Front

head restraints 48 New remote control 26 New wheels and tires 200

Night Vision, refer to BMW Night Vision 94

Night vision device, refer to BMW Night Vision 94

Nozzles, refer to Windshield washer nozzles 63

Nylon rope, refer to Tow- starting and towing 218

O OBD socket, refer to Socket

for Onboard Diagnostics interface 207

Octane ratings, refer to Fuel specifications 195

Odometer 72 Oil, refer to Engine oil 203 Oil change intervals refer to Service

requirements 75 Onboard computer, refer to

iDrive 16 Onboard vehicle tool kit 212 Opening and closing Comfort Access 34 from inside 30 from outside 28 using remote control 28 using the door lock 29 Operating principle, iDrive 17 Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17 Output, refer to Engine

data 224 Outside air, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air control 105

Outside temperature display 72, 73

changing unit of measure 74 in computer 74 Overview operating principle 17 radio control 146

P Panic mode 28

Park Distance Control PDC 82 Parked car heating, refer to

Parked car ventilation/ heating 107

Parked car ventilation 107 switching on and off

directly 107 Parked car ventilation system LED 103 Parking vehicle 57 Parking aid, refer to PDC Park

Distance Control 82 Parking assistant, refer to

PDC Park Distance Control 82

Parking brake 58 Parking brake, refer to

Handbrake 58 Parking lamps 98 replacing bulbs 213 Parts and accessories 6 Passenger-side exterior

mirror, tilting down 51 Pathway lighting 99 PDC Park Distance Control 82 Personal Profile 26 Phone book 175 Phone numbers dialing 176 Pinch protection system glass sunroof 38 power windows 37 Plasters, refer to First aid

kit 217 Plug-in unit for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 56

Polish 211 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated charcoal filter 107 Power failure 214 Power windows, refer to

Windows 36 Pressure, tires 196 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 87

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

244

Protective function, refer to Pinch protection system

glass sunroof 38 windows 37

R Radio controls 146 HD Radio 150 satellite radio 152 selecting waveband 149 storing stations 150 switching on/off 146 tone control 146 volume 146 weatherband, refer to

Weather news flashes 151 Radio key, refer to Keys/

remote control 26 Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 56 Radio readiness 56 switched off 57 switched on 56 with Comfort Access 35 Rain sensor, windshield wiper

system 62 Random sequence external devices 168 music collection 164 Reading lamps 102 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 213 Rearview mirrors, refer to

Mirrors 51 Rear window heating 105 opening and closing 37 Reception quality 150 radio stations 150 Recirculated-air mode, refer

to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 105

Recirculation of air, refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 105

Reclining seat, refer to Seats 45

Reflectors, refer to Tail lamps 213

Refueling 194 Releasing hood 202 Releasing the locks, refer to

Unlocking 34 Remaining distance, refer to

Cruising range 73 Remaining distance to

destination, refer to Computer 74

Remote control 26 Comfort Access 34 garage door opener 109 luggage compartment lid 28 malfunction 29, 35 replacing battery 35 Removing condensation on

the windows 105 Replacement fuses 215 Replacement of tires refer to Changing

wheels 214 Replacement remote control,

refer to New remote controls 26

Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 212

Replacing wheels/tires, refer to New wheels and tires 200

Reporting safety defects 7 Required fuel 195 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 73 Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 148 Residual heat 106 Restraint systems for children 53 refer to Safety belts 50 Retreaded tires 200 Reverse CD changer 156 CD player 156

Reverse gear manual transmission 58 Sport automatic

transmission 59 Road map 138 Roadside

Assistance 187, 217 Roadside parking lamps 100 replacing bulbs, refer to

Parking lamps 213 Rollover protection system on

Convertible 92 lowering 92 Rope, refer to Tow-starting

and towing 218 Rotary/pushbutton, refer to

iDrive 16 Route 136, 137 bypassing sections 137 changing 136, 137 changing criteria 136 displaying map view 138 displaying streets or towns/

cities 137 selecting 136 Route information, refer to

Destination guidance with voice instructions 137

Route map, refer to Displaying map view 138

Route selection 136 RSC Runflat System

Component, refer to Run- flat tires 200

Run-flat System Component RSC, refer to Run-flat tires 200

Run-flat tires 200 continuing driving with a

damaged tire 86, 88 flat tire 86, 88 Flat Tire Monitor 85 tire inflation pressure 196 Tire Pressure Monitor 87 tire replacement 200, 201 winter tires 201

R e

fe re

n ce

245

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

S Safety belts 50 damage 50 indicator lamp 50 reminder 50 sitting safely 45 Safety belt tensioners, refer to

Safety belts 50 Safety systems ABS Antilock Brake

System 83 airbags 90 driving stability control

systems 83 rollover protection system,

Convertible 92 safety belts 50 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat

tires 200 Satellite radio 152 enabling or disabling

channel 152 selecting channel 153 storing channel 153 Scale for navigation,

changing 139 Screen, refer to iDrive 16 Screw thread for tow

fitting 219 SDARS, refer to Satellite

radio 152 Seats 45 adjusting the seats 46 heating 50 lumbar support 46 memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 47

sitting safely 45 sports seat 46 storing the setting 47 thigh support 46 Section of route, altering 137 Securing cargo 122 ski bag 114 Selecting distance with active

cruise control 66 Selecting route 136

Selection options with navigation system 136

Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 217

Service Interval Display refer to CBS Condition

Based Service 206 refer to Service

requirements 75 Service Request 189 Service requirements 75 refer to CBS Condition

Based Service 206 Services status 190 Setting button, refer to

Controls, controller 16 Settings BMW Night Vision 96 changing on Control

Display 80 clock, 12h/24h mode 77 configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 26 DVD 157 language 80 Settings for the map view 139 Setting time, refer to

Preselecting activation times 107

Shifting, Sport automatic transmission 59

Short commands of voice activation system 228

Short route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 136

Shuffled, refer to Random CD changer 155 CD player 155 Side airbags 90 Side-mounted turn signals,

replacing bulbs 213 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 Sill panel lighting, refer to

Interior lamps 102 Sitting safely 45 with airbags 45 with head restraint 45 with safety belts 45 Ski bag 113

Sliding/tilt roof, refer to Glass sunroof, electric with raise function 38

Slope assistant, refer to Drive- off assistant 85

Smokers' package, refer to Ashtray 113

Snap-in adapter mounting/removing 182 using 172 Snow chains 201 Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 113 Socket for Onboard

Diagnostics interface 207 Socket for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 56 Soft closure aid, refer to

Automatic soft closing 31 SOS, refer to Initiating an

emergency request 216 Spare adapter for spare key 26 fuses 215 key 26 Special destinations 130 Special destinations,

displaying 132 Special destinations, entering

by name 131 Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 204 Specified oil grades, refer to

Approved engine oils 204 Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 79 Speedometer 12 Speed Volume 147 Speed with winter tires 201 Split screen, refer to Control

Display, switching on/off 19 Split screen content, refer to

Display for split screen content, selecting 20

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

246

Sport automatic transmission 58

Dynamic Driving Control 60 kickdown 59 releasing transmission

lock 60 towing 219, 220 with Comfort Access 35 Sport program in the Sport

automatic transmission 59 Stability control, refer to

Driving stability control systems 83

Start/Stop button 56 starting the engine 57 switching off the engine 57 Starting, refer to Starting

engine 57 Starting assistance, refer to

Jump starting 217 Starting difficulties, refer to

Jump starting 217 Starting off on slopes, refer to

Drive-off assistant 85 Start menu 17 Station, refer to Radio 149 Station, selecting radio 149 Stationary ventilation preselecting activation

times 107 Status information on Control

Display 19 Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5 Steam cleaners 208, 209 Steering wheel adjustment 52 automatic adjustment, refer

to Easy entry/exit 52 automatic adjustment, refer

to Steering wheel memory 47

buttons on steering wheel 11

heating 52 lock, refer to Ignition lock 56 memory 47

Steering with variable ratio, refer to Active steering 89

Steptronic, refer to Sport automatic transmission 58

Storage compartments 112 Stored trip, calling up 135 Storing 211 Storing a destination in the

address book 129 Storing music 161 Storing sitting position, refer

to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory 47

Storing tires 201 Storing your vehicle 211 Street, entering for

navigation 128 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 196 Surround 147 SVCD 156 SW, waveband 149 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching automatically

between high beams and low beams, refer to High- beam Assistant 100

Switching automatically between high beams and low beams, refer to High- beam assistant 100

Switching off engine 57 Switching on audio 146 CD changer 146 CD player 146 radio 146 Swiveling headlamps, refer to

Adaptive Light Control 99 Symbols 4 indicator/warning lamps 13

T Tachometer 72 Tail lamps 213 replacing bulbs 213

Tank capacity also refer to Capacities 227 fuel tank capacity 194 Target cursor for

navigation 132 Technical alterations, refer to

For your own safety 5 Technical data 224 capacities 227 dimensions 225 Telephone 172 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 111 refer to separate operating

instructions voice commands 179 TeleService 186 TeleService Diagnosis 188 TeleService Help 188 Temperature adjusting in upper body

region 106 adjusting with automatic

climate control 104 changing unit of measure 74 refer to Coolant

temperature 72 Temperature display outside temperature 72 outside temperature

warning 72 setting the units 74 Temperature gauge engine oil 73 Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 63 The individual vehicle 5 Tilt alarm sensor 33 switching off 34 Tilting down passenger-side

exterior mirror 51 Timer, refer to Preselecting

activation times 107 Tire inflation pressure 196 Tire pressure loss 86, 87 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 87 Tire Quality Grading 198

R e

fe re

n ce

247

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Tire replacement new wheels and tires 200 Tires age 198 air loss 86, 88 breaking-in 118 condition 199 damage 199 inflation pressure 196 minimum tread depth 199 new wheels and tires 200 pressure monitoring, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 85 pressure monitoring, refer to

Tire Pressure Monitor 87 replacing 200 retreaded tires 200 run-flat tires 200 size 197 size, refer to The right

wheels and tires 200 wear indicators 199 wheel/tire combination 200 winter tires 201 Tires with run-flat properties refer to Run-flat tires 200 TMC station, refer to Traffic

information 139 Tone control 146 middle setting 148 Tone on locking/unlocking 29 Tools, refer to Onboard

vehicle tool kit 212 Top 39 Top 50 of music

collection 163 Torque, refer to Engine

data 224 Tow bar 219 Tow fitting 218 Towing 218 methods 219 tow fittings 218 with manual

transmission 219 with Sport automatic

transmission 219 Town/city, for navigation 127

Tow rope 219 Tow-starting 218 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 87 resetting system 87 system limits 87 warning lamp 88 Tracks selecting with CD 154 Traction-assist feature, refer

to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 83

Traction control, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 83

Traffic bulletins categories 141 Traffic bulletins, filtering 141 Traffic congestion displaying traffic

information 139 refer to Bypassing route

sections 137 Traffic information for

navigation depiction in route map 141 during destination

guidance 141 Traffic information with

navigation 139 Transmission drive-off assistant 85 manual transmission 58 sport automatic

transmission 58 towing 219 transmission lock, manually

locking and unlocking, sport automatic transmission 60

Transporting children safely 53

Transport securing device, refer to Securing cargo 122

Tread depth, refer to Minimum tire tread 199

Trip, deleting 135 Trip, storing 134 Trip-distance counter refer to Trip meter 72

Trip meter 72 Trip odometer, refer to Trip

meter 72 Trips, changing 135 Trunk, refer to Luggage

compartment 32 Trunk lid, refer to Luggage

compartment lid 31 Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 225 Turn signals 61

U Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQR 198 Units average fuel

consumption 74 temperature 74 Universal garage-door

opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 109

Universal remote control, refer to Integrated universal remote control 109

Unlocking from inside 30 from outside 28 setting unlocking

behavior 28 without key, refer to Comfort

Access 34 Unlocking without key, refer to

Comfort Access 34 Updating the navigation

data 126 USB audio interface 166 Used batteries refer to Disposal 214 refer to Replacing battery 36 Using turn signals 61

V VCD 156

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

248

Vehicle battery 214 breaking-in 118 loading 120 measurements, refer to

Dimensions 225 parking 57 weights 227 Vehicle care, refer to Care 208 Vehicle jack 214 jacking points 214 Ventilation 106 draft-free 106 for cooling 106 while stationary 107 Venting refer to Ventilation 106 Vent outlets of automatic

climate control 103 Vents, refer to Ventilation 106 Video menu 157 Video playback 156 Viscosity 204 Voice, refer to Destination

guidance with voice instructions 137

Voice activation system overview 22 short commands 228 Voice commands telephone 179 Voice instructions for

navigation system 137 repeating 138 switching on/off 137 volume 138 Voice phone book 181 Volume 146 audio sources 146 cargo bay 227 fuel tank, refer to

Capacities 227 mobile phone 175 voice instructions 138 windshield cleaning system,

refer to Capacities 227 Volume balance, tone

setting 147

W Warning lamps, refer to

Indicator and warning lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 77

Warning on leaving lane, refer to Lane Departure Warning 96

Warning triangle 217 Washer fluid capacity of the reservoir 63 wiper system 63 Water on roads, refer to

Driving through water 120 Water penetration 208, 209 Waveband for radio 149 Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 199 Weather news flashes 151 Website BMW 4 Weights 227 Welcome lamps 98 Wheel/tire combination, refer

to New wheels and tires 200 Wheel/tire damage 199 Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 225 Wheels and tires 196 Width, refer to

Dimensions 225 Wind deflector 43 Windows 36 convenient closing with

Comfort Access 35 convenient opening and

closing 28, 30 opening and closing,

Convertible 36 opening and closing,

Coupe 36 rear window, Convertible 37

Windshield cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 62 defrosting, refer to

Defrosting windows 105 displays, refer to Head-up

Display 93 Windshield wash automatic, refer to Rain

sensor 62 capacities, reservoir 227 filler neck for washer

fluid 203 nozzles 63 washer fluid 63 wiper system 62 Windshield wipers, refer to

Wiper system 62 wiper blade

replacement 212 Winter tires 201 setting speed limit 79 storage 201 Wiper blades replacement 212 Wiper system 62 rain sensor 62 washer fluid 63 windshield washer

nozzles 63 Word matching principle for

navigation 135 Working in the engine

compartment 202 Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer

to Onboard vehicle tool kit 212

X Xenon lamps 213 replacing bulbs 213

Y Your individual vehicle settings, refer to Personal

Profile 26

<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 6 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 6 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 6 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2010 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.